JP7426719B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known that controls the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (
So-called two types of gaming machines). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the jackpot, and It is configured such that a prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the results of the special symbol lottery, in order to improve the interest of the game, after performing the first reach effect (long reach, SP reach), a second reach effect (SP reach) is performed.
A gaming machine that performs SP reach is known (see Patent Document 1).

JP2013-236850A

However, it has been desired to further improve the interest of the game by further improving the performance of the game such as the reach performance.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the sixth pachinko gaming machine) can display a variable identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine capable of transitioning to a special gaming state,
Effect execution means (for example, a sub for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the effect accessory group 58, and the effect button device 6310 control circuit 300, sub CPU 301),
The performance execution means is
When the first performance execution condition (for example, acquisition of the road to the ultimate battle icon) is established by performing the first performance (for example, the cherry blossom accumulation notice), the second performance (for example, the road to the ultimate battle) is established. is executable,
A second performance execution condition that is different from the first performance execution condition (for example, display of five character icons) by performing a third performance different from the first performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) When established, the fourth performance (for example, the road to the decisive battle) can be executed,
The second performance and the fourth performance are capable of performing specific performances of the same type (for example, a performance aiming to collect 10 character icons), and
If the third performance execution condition (for example, less than 10 character icons) is satisfied by performing the second performance or the fourth performance, the special performance (for example, Great Decisive Battle Reach) is not executed and , it is possible to perform a fifth performance (for example, confrontation reach) that is different from the special performance , and when the third performance execution condition is not satisfied (10 character icons), the third performance can be executed. The special performance can be performed without performing the performance in 5 .
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform a development progress performance that displays predetermined development information and progresses according to the displayed development information (for example, a performance that aims to collect 10 character icons). ,
It is possible to display information other than predetermined development information as the development progress presentation,
The fifth performance is characterized in that it is possible to perform a development performance related to the development information (for example, a performance using a support icon).

According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, and (B) an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving setting processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a pre-read per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a flowchart showing a pre-read performance pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the jackpot type look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead play form to a time-saving win look-ahead play form. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the machine according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko game machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a limiter frequency|count update process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance pattern determination processing in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the effect of bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 6th pachinko game machine is seen diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in the 6th pachinko game machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the presentation flow in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table for a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table of the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon collection order scenario determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a fan preview determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the western mode and the eastern mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) illustrating the presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (Part 2) for explaining a pseudo continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (No. 3) for explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of the road to the ultimate battle in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a lotus flower preview performance in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a battle reach effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a block diagram explaining the structure of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the performance button device in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal outputted to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is referred to as the front side,
The back side of the pachinko machine is towards the rear, and the left side when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is towards the left.
When looking at the pachinko machine from the front, the right side is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the right direction. The counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process, which will be described later, are displayed. (below,
(also referred to as "regular symbol lottery") is finalized. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, a first pachinko game machine, a second pachinko game machine, and a third pachinko game machine are described.
In explaining the pachinko gaming machines, an example will be described in which the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol). However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is variable. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the display is on hold; Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as
(referred to as a "sequential variable machine").

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. This is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as not being displayed, and variable display of the first special symbol being suspended. In addition, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. This is true if all certain requirements are met, such as display being withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the game is on hold, and that the first hold is a hold on the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting condition for the second special symbol is that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner;
It is not a jackpot game state, etc., the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and
This holds true when at least all of the conditions that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (Figure 2
, see FIG. 3), board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and game board unit 10 (see FIG.
(see) etc. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

The outer frame 2 is connected to a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, which will be described later, via a base door 3.
High strength is required to support a large number of members such as the display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 can be
It is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size. Especially if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum,
It is also possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (
(see FIG. 4 described below) and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and in front of these LED groups 46, an L
An ED cover is provided. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. This plate unit 5
As described above, the base door 3 is configured so that it can be rotated to open and close with respect to the base door 3, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee of the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The production button 54 is the so-called “C
This is called a "HANCE button" or a "push button." The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. Lower plate 5
2 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 52 is opened, the lower plate 5
The game balls stored in 2 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise.
placed on the surface side. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

The game balls fired from the firing device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 are placed on the firing rail (
(not shown), rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4, described later), and is launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100.
The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed.
In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the dispensing condition is satisfied, the dispensing device 82 releases the ball from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81.
A predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied to the player are paid out onto an upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. Board 9
2. A payout/launch control board 93 on which is mounted a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) that controls the payout/launch of game balls, and a power supply circuit 450 that supplies power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (reference) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 9
3 and a power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, and these boards are all housed in a board case.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. A center accessory 115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 120, a general prize opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting opening 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, LED unit 160, and out port 178
and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 10. In addition,
As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the game panel 10
0 may be entirely made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized when viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. In addition, game panel 1
00 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110.
The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. Game area 10
The game balls fired toward the ball 5 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In this specification, as the operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, the hitting method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting",
A hitting method in which the game ball is launched in a downward motion is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115.
The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

At the back side of the stage 118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 119 into which game balls can enter.
is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 119 is configured to be released directly above the first starting opening 120. Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119,
Compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119, it has a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first starting entrance 120. There is.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG.
(see ). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol A random number value for jackpot determination, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for reach determination for the first special symbol,
Then, various random numbers such as a random number for selecting a first special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The stored various data are subjected to the first special symbol hit determination process when the first special symbol starting condition (also referred to as "first special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol,
Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

Further, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case.
In place of or in addition to 2, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127,
Various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the normal symbols, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a grand prize opening 131, a count switch 132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), and a special electric accessory 133.
It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

Moreover, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is a prize opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, big prize opening 1
The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls to 31 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, the second starting port 14
It is not essential that 0 be configured in this way, and it may be provided in the right side area 107, for example.
Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, A random number value for jackpot determination, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for reach determination for the second special symbol,
Then, various random numbers such as a random number for selecting a second special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The stored various data are subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side area 106 (more specifically, on the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146. In this example, the above winning opening is the second
A starting port 140 is used, and the above-mentioned switch is used as a second starting port switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147 made of a blade member, for example, called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 147. . The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. In addition, the movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the large winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 178 is
It is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both game balls hit to the left and game balls hit to the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning ports 122, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6, described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 300. The performance accessory group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (for example, see FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time saving notification display section 168.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the normal symbol display LED 161
Variable display of normal symbols in which a and 161b alternately turn on and off begins. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

If the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161
The combination of turning on and off the lights a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 It becomes easier for the game ball to enter (pass) the prize.

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 displays the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when normal symbol start information, that is, variable display is pending. It is equipped with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Also, if the number of reserved symbols is 2,
Both of the normal symbol hold display LEDs 162a and 162b light up. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. First special symbol display section 163
For example, the first special symbol display LED group includes eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, the eight LEDs 163a to 1 constituting the first special symbol display section 163
A variable display of the first special symbol in which all or part of 63h alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of the first special symbol started, the first
The variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h that constitute the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the second special symbol") are satisfied, the eight LEDs 164a to 1 constituting the second special symbol display section 164
A variable display of the second special symbol in which all or part of 64h alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of the second special symbol started, the second
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that constitute the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol pending display section displays the number of variable displays of special symbols that are pending (hereinafter referred to as the "number of pending special symbols") when special symbol start information, that is, variable displays are pending. It includes a first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays, when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved,
The first special symbol reservation display LED 165a is for displaying the number of reservations for the first special symbol.
, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is pending" means that the first starting port 1
After the winning (passage) of the game ball to 20 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted,
This refers to the state until the starting conditions for the first special symbol are met.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 includes first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165.
The number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. In addition, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 3, the reservation display L for the first special symbol
The ED 165a blinks and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, if the number of reservations for the first special symbol is 4, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol
, 165b both blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays, when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved,
A second special symbol reservation display LED 166a that displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol.
, 166b. "The variable display of the second special symbol is pending" means that the second starting port 1
After the winning (passing) of the game ball to 40 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted,
This refers to the state until the starting conditions for the second special symbol are met.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 includes second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166.
The number of pending variable displays of the second special symbol is displayed by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. In addition, if the number of reservations for the second special symbol is 3, the reservation display L for the second special symbol
The ED 166a blinks and the second special symbol pending display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, if the number of second special symbols reserved is 4, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a
, 166b both blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Probability change notification display section)
The probability change notification display section 167 can be turned on during execution of probability change control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probability variation control is being executed, but, for example, the display unit 167 may be turned on so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probability variation control is being executed. The fact that this is being executed may be kept secret.

However, if the power is cut off while variable control is being executed, the backup capacitor 2 (described later)
Due to the function 07, data indicating that variable probability control is being executed is not lost. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the probability change control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the probability change notification display section 167 lights up in such a manner that it can be visually recognized that the probability change control is being performed.

Note that even if it is hidden before the power is turned off whether or not the probability change control is being executed, the probability change notification display section 167 is turned on when the power is turned on. By that,
It is configured so that it can be recognized that variable rate control is being executed.

(Display section for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time saving notification display section 168 is, for example, the first time saving notification display section 168.
a and a second time-saving notification display section 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display sections 168 is not limited to this.

Although details will be described later, the time-saving gaming state includes an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state. For example, it is configured such that it is possible to grasp which time-saving game state the game is in by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display section 168a and the second time-saving notification display section 168b.

The time-saving notification display section 168 displays the first time-saving notification display section 168a according to the time-saving control that is being executed.
Or/and the second time-saving notification display section 168b may be turned on, but for example, in a mode in which it is not possible to visually determine whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control that is being executed (for example, By turning on or off the lights (all lights off, all lights on, mode unrelated to the time saving control being executed), it is not possible to tell from the appearance that the time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed. It may be kept secret. In particular, although it may be possible to determine from the appearance whether or not the time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to determine from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. By keeping the type of time-saving control hidden, it is possible to increase interest.

However, if the power is cut off during execution of time saving control, the backup capacitor 2 (described later)
With the function 07, not only the data indicating that the time saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of the time saving control being executed are not lost. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the time saving control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the time saving notification display section 168 is displayed in such a manner that it is possible to visually understand that the time saving control is in progress and the type of time saving control that is being executed. turns on or off.

Note that even if the time-saving control is being executed before the power is turned off, or the type of time-saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In such a case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be visually recognized.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Figure 6 is
It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a WDT (watchdog) that monitors the operation.
timer) and fraud prevention functions.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU
Although a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of 201, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, a time saving notification display section 168, a normal electricity solenoid 148, a special electricity solenoid 135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Also, error notification monitor 1
In addition to the error code, 72 includes, for example, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress if the pachinko game machine has a setting function described later. It is also possible to display codes, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

The main control circuit 200 also includes a first starting port switch 121 and a second starting port switch 141.
, passing gate switch 127, count switch 132, and general prize opening switch 1
23 etc. is also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is sent to I/O port 2.
05 to the main control circuit 200.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, and a setting key 174 that is operated when changing or checking setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, which will be described later.
, a backup clear switch 176, etc., which can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to an operation by an administrator of the gaming hall, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and for example, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the payout/fire control circuit 40.
0 or the power supply circuit 450. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, and a work RAM 3.
03, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU30
1 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. Note that the display device 7
The image data to be displayed includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC is a sub CPU
In response to a voice generation command from 301, one voice data is selected from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that allows the game balls to be fired. a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending;
etc. are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side,
It may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include "special symbol games" that use special symbols and "normal symbol games" that use normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole 120, 140, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state is treated as one special symbol game. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is After the result of the processing is derived, when the small winning game state is controlled, the period until the end of the small winning gaming state is one special symbol game.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 133 operates to open the jackpot 131 for a predetermined period of time (for example, up to 30
A round game that is open for 000 msec) is executed, and the possibility of winning a prize in the big prize opening 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, in the normal symbol game, the stop display mode that indicates a normal symbol hit is the normal symbol display section 16.
1, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) becomes open due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting opening 140 becomes relatively small. be enhanced.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the first starting port 120 or the second
A special symbol start winning process that is performed when there is a winning (passage) to the starting opening 140, and
This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of special symbol starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Then, based on the result of the production pattern determination process, the display device 7
For example, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area, and effect control processing such as sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 are performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state where there is no jackpot is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. In addition, if it is not a jackpot but a time-saving win, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting award process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 (for example, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol design, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for performance selection) Various data such as various random values such as numerical values, etc.) are held until the starting conditions of the special symbol are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140 between when the special symbol starts winning and until the special symbol's starting conditions are met. A pre-read judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern based on the start information obtained prior to the special symbol winning judgment process. It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140 is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and performs a variable display control process to control the variable display of the normal symbol.
Then, a performance control process for performing a predetermined performance is executed. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control processing and production control processing of the normal symbols are completed, the main CPU
Step 201 determines whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). Becomes an open state where (passage) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, 2 starting port 140 (see Figure 4)
) corresponds to control that performs at least one of the following: power support control that increases the frequency of opening the switch. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters a prize opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)),
Winning probability of “per normal symbol”, variable display time of normal symbol, or/and normal electric accessory 1
46 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of the normal symbol, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, Second
The extraction method for the special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range (width). A soft random number method may be used in which random numbers are generated internally, or a hard random number method may be used in which random numbers are extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random numbers are updated at a predetermined period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot gaming state is divided into a low probability state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be broadly classified.

The high-probability gaming state includes a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Although it is not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. It may also be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state includes an A-time-saving gaming state, a B-time-saving gaming state, and a C-time-saving gaming state.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, when the jackpot gaming state has ended and the variable display of special symbols has started in a non-high probability gaming state (i.e., a gaming state where the probability change flag is off), or when the RAM has been cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the time-saving game state can be entered, and a specified number of special symbol games are executed. , When the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of time-saving winning is derived,
When the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times determined by winning the "time-saving win" or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state C ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, if a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the time-saving game state C continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the main CPU 201 controls to internally activate any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally operating the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Operating in parallel is called "executing in parallel." However, the main CPU
Even if 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in a layered manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even if a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed overlappingly, the player understands that the game is being controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving gaming states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained.

Normal game state, time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state),
Even if the game is controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to shift to any of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state (for example, high-precision time-saving gaming state). However, the time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the jackpot gaming state ends is limited to the A-time-saving gaming state.

When controlled to be in a high-precision gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high-precision gaming state to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. Similarly,
From the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, there is no transition to the high certainty gaming state unless the game goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it cannot shift to the A time saving gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state.
However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if the control is in either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, once the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the normal gaming state will be entered. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between time-saving game states will be explained.

When the A time saving gaming state is controlled, the number of times that can be executed in the A time saving gaming state is set to be less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. There is no transition to the time-saving gaming state. Further, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the B working time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", the conditions for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state are met, so the A-time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state may overlap. . However, as mentioned above, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the C time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state.

B When controlled in time-saving gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"
If so, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state C are satisfied, and the time-saving gaming state B and the time-saving gaming state C can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

C: When controlled in the time-saving gaming state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"
If so, the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, and the C time-saving gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state may overlap.

In addition, details regarding the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

The first pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 is
Control is executed to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a regular game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (eg, firing mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, the above-mentioned setting key 17
4 or the backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6), for example, set
It can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values such as ~Setting 6. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, setting 4
It is about 1/304 with setting 5, about 1/299 with setting 6, and about 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variable flag is on (in this example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variable control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, approximately 1/76 at setting 2, Setting 3
, approximately 1/75th, setting 4 approximately 1/74th, setting 5 approximately 1/73rd, setting 6 approximately 1/72nd.
It becomes.

Note that, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values. For example, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/160, and when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/240. There is. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the number of set time saving times) may be varied depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times will be set as the number of time saving times, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times will be set as the number of time saving times. You can also do this.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery targets, but small wins may be included in the lottery targets. When a small win is included in the lottery target, the small win probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the lottery, the small hit will only be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You can also make it wet. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The short-time winning probability and the small winning probability when the lottery includes the above-mentioned short winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, but they are not limited to this, and may vary depending on the setting value. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is shown for example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time-saving hit" is based on the random numerical value for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball enters the starting opening 120, 140. , is a table that is referred to when determining a "jackpot" or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting opening 120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this example, the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
Extracted from. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

Note that in this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off;
When the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether it is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, similar to the hit determination process for the first special symbol. ” is decided. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 201
determines that it is a "time saving win" and determines the win/loss judgment value data to be "time saving winning judgment value data".
In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot".
It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data is the "jackpot judging value data". In addition, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201
It is determined that it is a "loss" and the determination value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot",
The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201
The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". Also, the second
If the probability change flag is off during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot",
The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Furthermore, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is 478 to 65535.
If either of these is the case, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a “lose” and changes the determination value data to “
"Loss judgment value data" is determined.

For example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot",
The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is 1124 to 6553.
5, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

As described above, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process), It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( It becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data) by simply increasing the width of the judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state This will effectively extend the period, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" can be won regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". "
The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops.
The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
”.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
For example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is between 10 and 59, the main CPU 2
01 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
Select. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the second special symbol random number is between 97 and 99, the main C
PU201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "z" as the symbol designation command.
Select "A7".

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
For example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201
"z9" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if the second special symbol random number is between 60 and 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
9".

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
Regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Fig. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Fig. 10) is determined. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) shows the main ROM 20 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of the special symbol stop mode determination table stored in 2. The special symbol stop mode determination table specifies whether the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.
It is referred to when determining the stopping mode of the special symbol drawn to the special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) in accordance with the selection symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, an area of 0 to 7. It consists of a 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. , area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol. corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. , area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the display mode of the LEDs (display mode of time-saving win) led to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
When the selected symbol command is “z1”, the main CPU 201 displays the first special symbol display section 163.
Of the eight LEDs that make up the LED, the LED 163a corresponds to area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponds to area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED corresponds to area 7 of the first special symbol.
It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED D163h is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. In such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are lit, and the other LEDs are turned off,
It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed. Also, the selection symbol command is “z
7'', the main CPU 201 displays the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display section 164.
Among them, the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol, the LED 164b corresponding to the area 1 of the second special symbol, and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are lit,
It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 selects the second special symbol display section 1.
64, an LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol, an LED 164c corresponding to area 2 of the second special symbol, and an LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol. The second special symbol display section 16 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.
4 is decided to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a “jackpot”, the special symbol display section 163
, 164 (the display mode of the jackpot) is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163.
3d, the LED 163e corresponding to the area 4 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped in such a manner that the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to display. If the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CP
Among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section 163, U201 includes an LED 163d corresponding to area 3 of the first special symbol, an LED 163f corresponding to area 5 of the first special symbol, and an LED 163f corresponding to area 5 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is “z5”, the main CPU 201 selects the eight L
Of the ED, the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area 4 of the first special symbol
LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5,
It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163g corresponding to the special symbol area 6 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. The selection symbol command is “z9
", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the area 3 of the second special symbol and the LED 164e corresponding to the area 4 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display section 164. , the second special symbol display section 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the second special symbol display section 1.
64, the LED 164d corresponding to area 3 of the second special symbol and the LED 164f corresponding to area 5 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. 2. It is determined that the special symbol display section 164 should be stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is “lose”, the special symbol display section 163
, 164 (display mode of loss) is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163.
It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that only the LED 3h is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is “z11”, the main CPU 201
Of the eight LEDs that make up the second special symbol display section 164, the second special symbol display section 164 is turned on in such a manner that only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. Decide to stop display.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

FIG. 12(B) shows the program RO of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine.
This is an example of a decorative pattern stop mode determination table stored in M. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of decorative patterns that is derived when the variable display of decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 stops, in response to a pattern designation command. be done. Note that the "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 12(B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In addition, since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled to display the special symbol being displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display performance in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol being variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 include a left pattern consisting of 9 symbols 1 to 9, and a middle pattern consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern. , the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving win. By stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in this embodiment, odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, a small win symbol is added to the symbols constituting the middle symbol. (a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops displaying the medium symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can understand that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 determines the stop mode of the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

If the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
If it is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol and the right symbol at an odd-numbered symbol, and stopping the middle symbol at a time-saving symbol. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as you can see from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case where the symbol command is ``zA1'' or ``zA6'' (when the selected symbol command is ``z0'', ``z1'' or ``z7''), the number of time savings set is greater, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

If the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "zA3" or "zA8")
In the case of "Jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 stops the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol at odd numbered symbols (a row of eyes) as the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped.

If the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
In the case of "Jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 stops the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in the even-numbered symbols (in a row) as the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped. In addition, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"), There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the even-numbered symbols (matched), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set to ON).

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8"'', the expected value of the probability change flag being set on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller. In this respect, the symbol designation command is "zA3"
Or, if it is "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than if the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lose"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a random spot. The loose pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the stop mode of the decorative symbols according to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is "zA1", the left symbol "2", the middle symbol "Time-saving", and the right symbol "4") is Although shown as an example, the stop mode shown in the column of the stop mode of the decorative pattern in FIG. 12(B) is just an example, and is not limited thereto.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. The selection symbol command is “
In the case of "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 50 times. If the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CP
U201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 100 times. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, in the main CPU 201, the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state).
Even if it is, as shown in Fig. 10, if a "time-saving win" lottery is performed and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving win", a "time-saving win" will be drawn indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won. Although the display mode of is derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, without being controlled to the C time-saving gaming state,
It is also possible to continue the high certainty gaming state.

In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery when the probability change flag is on, and forcibly changes the display mode of a loss to the special symbol display section even if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win". 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on, time-saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, "time-saving winning" is not included in the lottery result (result of special symbol winning judgment processing). A determination process may also be performed. In this case, time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination when the probability change flag is off, and time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned when the probability change flag is on. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is off, the width of the random number assigned to the time-saving hit judgment value data is changed to the loss judgment value data, jackpot judgment value data, or loss judgment value instead of the time-saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both data and jackpot judgment value data.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 20
1, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000.
In these cases, the main CPU 201 changes the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display section 16.
After deriving the number 3,164, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In this case, main CPU2
01, after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, it is controlled to a jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control to a high-accuracy time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON.
Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

The time-saving performance in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in A-time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 determines the state of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is,
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the state of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 13.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the random number value (performing the winning/losing judgment),
Determine the success or failure (“time saving win”, “big hit” or “loss”). Then the main CPU
201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. 11, and calculates the random symbol value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140 and the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data. The selected symbol command is determined based on the selected symbol command, and the type of display mode (time saving type or jackpot type) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5").
, or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2", "z
8). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, the position of a "jackpot" can be increased.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state may be set higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This figure 1
4, the number of time savings in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (selected symbol command is "z5",
In the case of "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time savings in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z
7'') or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is ``z2'' or ``z8'').
In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 etc. are intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot gaming state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). .

[1-4-6. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. “Remarks” in Figure 15
The time-saving hits A, B, and C shown in the column are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot) as a result of the special symbol hit determination process. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A, B, C, D
, E is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 140. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S96 in FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is extracted, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and does not set the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is sent to the main CPU 20 via the command output port 206.
1 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, if the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the time saving flag is on, regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be made to be different in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming state. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". It is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

The B time-saving gaming state starts, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change starts. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process in the final ceiling fluctuation is “
In the case of "Loss", the display mode of "Loss" is displayed on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the state shifts to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, changing the decorative pattern to a special symbol) to show the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been met (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). or stop it with
Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special performance by a character, or a performance in which both of these are performed. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the transition to the B time-saving game state is not made.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variation flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is controlled unless the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". In a pachinko game machine where the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small win", the small win display mode The B time-saving game state may be started when the is drawn on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small winning game state ends. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small win is displayed on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. , the above-mentioned display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. Note that in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may vary depending on the setting value. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "Jackpot".
In this case, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on and the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, the R
When the work area (volatile area) in the AM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a game machine that can change the probability of winning a normal symbol. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, each time the special symbol is displayed variablely,
The ceiling counter is updated. For example, when the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value is calculated every time the ceiling counter is cleared.
It may be set by the main CPU 201, or it may be predetermined as something specific to the pachinko game machine instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 Update the ceiling counter (+1). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if a special symbol is displayed variablely, but for example, if it is a ST machine or a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag will not be updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after turning off. In addition, in the case of a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so if the ceiling counter is updated at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a specification in which the main CPU 201 performs a high probability rolling lottery, when the sub CPU 301 receives the command sent from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 produces an effect that suggests winning the high probability rolling lottery or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform a performance that suggests a transition from a state to a low-probability gaming state. By doing so, the display device 7 indicates the start point of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state.
It becomes difficult for the player to understand based on the display effects etc. displayed, and it becomes possible to provide an interesting game experience. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, by displaying a countdown effect or a fake countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Additionally, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of special symbols after the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the time or end of the process.

Furthermore, a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates the ceiling counter (
+1).

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') )
It may be the time when B starts, or it may be the time when B time saving final fluctuation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving winning". In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are that a time-saving win is won (a time-saving win where the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7", or "z8"), and the display mode of the time-saving win is a special symbol. It is to be derived (determined and displayed) on the display sections 163 and 164.
Furthermore, even if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the C-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and If the specification is such that the C time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", the C
Do not shift to time-saving gaming state. In addition, if the condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C-time saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 will not make the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. The display mode of the special symbol display section 163
, 164.

In addition, the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state are determined in response to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met. The prescribed number of C time savings, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time saving gaming state, starts variable display of the special symbol for the number of time saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving final variation"). It may be set when the C time saving final variation is completed, or when the C time saving final variation is completed. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state is
It is sufficient that the period is from the start of the C time saving final variation until the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending condition for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending condition for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the fact that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the information may include that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that a time-saving fall lottery has been conducted and that the time-saving fall lottery has been won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process in S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol.
The normal symbol hit determination table includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data for each time saving type. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201
If the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79, it is determined that it is a "normal symbol win" and the win/loss determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data." In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

As described above, in this example, among the non-time saving gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A working time saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16) Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table includes the type of time saving, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the passing gate 12.
6 (see Figure 4) when selecting the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through. This is a table referenced by "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The random number of normal symbols is, for example, 0~
Extracted from 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 99,
The main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits.
2" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the symbol command to select when a normal symbol hits.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits.
5" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the symbol command to select when a normal symbol hits.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz7" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits.
8" is selected, and if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the symbol command to select when a normal symbol hits.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. , After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol.
It is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, the selection symbol command when hitting a normal symbol is “f
z0'', the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is “fz1”, the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see Fig. 4), is determined by the first opening time 2.
000 msec, wait time 200 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is “fz2”, the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see Fig. 4), is determined by the first opening time 2.
500 msec, wait time 200 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is “fz3”, the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see Fig. 4), is set at the first opening time 3.
000 msec, wait time 200 msec, and second release time 3000 msec.

Also, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be 2500 msec for the first opening time, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

Also, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz6" and "fz9",
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed to the non-time-saving game state. Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the state A, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the most advantageous mode is the most unfavorable mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (that is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process that is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later). referenced in the following). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and selects the normal symbol effect based on the gaming state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time saving game state, the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 0 to 99.
In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. If either of the above is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 800 mse.
c.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000ms.
ec is determined and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000ms.
ec is determined and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is in the non-time saving gaming state, A
Among the variable display times of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A-time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied]
In the above explanation, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saver win" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You can do it like this.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Duplication of time-saving gaming states]
When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are provided, the time-saving gaming states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving winning", the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state will overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed overlappingly, or the time-saving game states may not overlap (that is, the "time-saving hit" is ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap, the prescribed number of A time saving gaming states, which is the end condition for the A working time saving gaming state, is set to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game states overlap, a mode in which the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode of repeatedly executing time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate.If the time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C. Possible modes include a mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed overlappingly, and a mode in which the B-time saving game state is executed in a layered manner when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which time-saving game state C is superimposed on first time-saving game state]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display section 163,
In step 164, the display mode per time saving is derived. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and adopts as the time-saving number the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state and the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving game state is greater than the number of times you can execute based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 2
01 maintains the time-saving performance of the A-time-saving gaming state and controls the time-saving gaming state until the remaining number of time-savings in the A-time-saving gaming state is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 200, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of time savers that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case of the number of times, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from here on is as long as a "jackpot" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, the appearance of the number of working hours and the time-saving performance is This is the same as the case where the A time-saving gaming state is continued without winning.

On the other hand, for example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, and the number of time savings that can be executed based on this "time saving win" is greater than the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state, the main CP
U201 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived,
The time saving game state is controlled until the number of time saving times set based on the "time saving win" is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 20, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50.
In the case that the time saving performance of the time saving game state A is maintained, the number of time saving times from this point on is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, 2 is the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver gaming state.
Even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 0 times, the variable display of the special symbol is further executed 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode of executing B time saving gaming state overlapping C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the following, the case where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be explained. .

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example,
When the remaining number of time savers in the C time saver game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and B
If the prescribed number of times of time saving is 200, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, the number of time saving from here on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving gaming state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the prescribed number of B time-savings is greater than the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. In this case, while maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state C, the number of time saving times from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small win display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", a loss display format is derived. . When the small win display mode is derived, the small win game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving flag on even during the small win game state.

Next, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final variation, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are different. A case where this holds true will be explained. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Special symbol display section 163,1
Different controls may be executed depending on the case where control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being derived at step 64.

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is changed to the special symbol display section 163, 164.
164, it has already been controlled to the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, main C
The PU201 maintains the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state and, unless a "jackpot" is derived, plays the time saving game until the greater of the prescribed number of B time saving times and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is exhausted. control to the state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is changed to the special symbol display section 163, 164.
At the time when the game is derived at step 164, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state while satisfying the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, deriving the display mode of a jackpot, deriving a display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, the time saving game state is controlled until the larger of the prescribed number of time saving times B and the number of time saving times in the time saving game state C is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed are satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be ended.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the sub CPU 301 executes the B time-saving game that is performed when only the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied. A special display performance that is different from the transition display performance and the C time-saving shift display performance that is performed when only the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied may be performed. In addition, instead of this, for example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state is maintained, a B time saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state is maintained, a C time saving transition display effect is performed. etc.,
Either one of the B time saving transition display performance and the C time saving transition display performance may be performed with priority.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts the B time-saving game. To control a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when executing multiple time-saving gaming states at the same time]
Above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the first time-saving gaming state, and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a superimposed manner on the C time-saving gaming state have been explained.

If the specification is such that a plurality of time-saving gaming states can be executed in parallel, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack may be different, but it is not possible to make the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack to be the same. preferable.

For example, if the specification is such that the C time saving game state can be executed overlapping the first time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the first time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state be the same. In addition, if the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be executed overlapping the C time saving gaming state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state be the same.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in succession, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later on top of the time-saving gaming state that has been executed first is, for example, It may be provided with one time-saving performance that is the same as the current time-saving gaming state and another time-saving performance that is different from this one time-saving performance. Then, when executing a time-saving game state over the time-saving game state that has been executed first, the first time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If you do not want to repeat this, you may activate other time-saving abilities.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow the B time saving gaming state to be executed in the C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state can be set to the same time saving performance as the C time saving gaming state, and this one time saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances are provided with other time-saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time-saving game state, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance is activated. may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly]
A mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. A possible mode (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode") is possible in which a hit determination process is performed and the time-saving gaming states are not executed overlappingly even if the time-saving gaming states overlap. In the latter mode, even if you win a time-saving win in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, you can ignore this and repeat the C-time-saving gaming state. There are two possible modes: a mode in which it is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not executed again. Below, the above two modes considered as the latter mode will be explained.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the time-saving game state C is not executed in combination with the time-saving game state 1]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, main CPU20
1 is a time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C-time-saving gaming state based on "time-saving winning" unless it is a variable display of the last special symbol in the time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving final variation"). The time-saving game state is controlled to 1 until the remaining number of time-saving games is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if you win the "time saving win" in the time saving final variation in the first time saving game state,
The main CPU 201 determines whether one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, or when the display mode of the time-saving hit is displayed on the special symbol display section 163.
, 164, and when one time-saving gaming state ends, different control can be executed.

First, if one time-saving gaming state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the main CPU 201, after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit,
Start controlling the time-saving gaming state.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the display mode per time-saving is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, when the display mode per time-saving is derived and the one time-saving gaming state ends. When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed before the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the first time saving gaming state without controlling to the C time saving gaming state. End the time-saving gaming state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode per time saver before the end process of one time saver game state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saver game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU
201, when the display mode per time saving is derived, if the ending process of the first time saving gaming state has not been processed, the first working time saving gaming state is ended without controlling to the C working time saving gaming state, and the first time saving gaming state is finished. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which B time-saving game state is not executed in combination with C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss", the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of time-saving games in the C-time saving gaming state is exhausted. The time saving game state C is controlled until the game is completed.

However, if the remaining number of time savers in the C time saver game state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main C
The PU 201 may or may not start controlling the B time saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving gaming state is performed after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B time saving gaming state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23, the main processing executed by the main CPU 201 (
Main control main processing) will be explained. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S
11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (S11 is
In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are turned on/off.
The off state is stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for activation. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Perform checksum value verification processing for the area (S16)
. After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (S17
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the verification result is abnormal in S17, that is, it is not normal (
If S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, N
If the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are both off, or if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the judgment is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (S18 is NO)
(in the case of determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (in the case of YES determination in S18),
The main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process is carried out by I/O port 2, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170.
Set error display data to the output port of 05. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. The main CPU 201 is S2
After executing 0 processing, it enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and is designed to re-store a value indicating a setting change. After executing the process in S21, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S2.
Move to 2.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203,
Determines the current startup status (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Main C
After executing the process in S23, the PU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags etc. is cleared (
For example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) are performed. Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared.
After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this process,
Initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.
After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process in step S27, the process moves to step S28. For details on the power outage process, see Figure 2.
This will be described later with reference to 5.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S29.
Move to.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S31 and then moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. In addition, this process is performed in the main RAM2
This is done using a different area (outside the area) from the work area in 03. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S32, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6ms, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2msec).
It is ec.

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (S35 is YES)
(in the case of determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. Main C
After executing the process of S36, the PU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main processing, an interrupt prohibition period (S
26 to S35) are provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.
After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of S38, the process moves to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. For details of this special symbol control process, see Figure 2.
This will be described later with reference to 6. After executing the process in S39, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S4.
Move to 0.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process,
Processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process in S40, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S40.
Move to 41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second
Setting processing of display data to be output to the special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. Main CPU2
01, after executing the process of S41, the process moves to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (S5
2), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S53, the startup initial setting process is ended and the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (if NO in S54), the main CP
U201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S56, the startup initial setting process is ended and the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power cutoff process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S
61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIG. 20).
-Refer to Figure 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (S61 is
In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. Main C
After executing the process of S62, the PU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). Main CPU201
After executing the process of S71, the process moves to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S71, an address setting process is performed in which the address of the special symbol work area, etc. in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demonstration display command when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command,
The sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S72 is YE
In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol has not been withheld (if the determination is NO in S73), the main CPU 201
, the process moves to S74.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (if S73 is YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol is the start of variable display.
That is, it is determined whether the starting information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been suspended (if NO determination is made in S74), the main CPU 201
ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (if S74 is YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and starts the process with the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 23).
).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps 71 to S75) within an interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the start information of the first special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (
S75) may be executed as a priority variable machine, or the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 1
It may also be a sequential variation machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the order of winning to 40.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, in S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26), the main CPU
The special symbol management process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is such that when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is the second special symbol to be processed.
(see) is YES, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, the control state number is “0”.
”, the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S8
1).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and transfers the process to the special symbol control process (
(see Figure 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S81 is YE
In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S83. In addition, the main CP
U201 performs the processing from S83 onwards based on the control state number read out in the processing of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S8
Process 3 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This S8
The process No. 4 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S85 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S87 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S88 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processing of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing,
The process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display start process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "
0'' (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S91 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S9
1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but if it is a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol win is included. If the result of the determination process is a small win, a small win flag is set on. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S93, the process moves to S94. Note that the time saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that the game is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process to judge or determine the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, time-saving hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S94) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, etc. or/
The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) (see S84) will be performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S98, the process moves to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process,
It mainly performs updating processing of various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to gaming state management. After executing the process in S100, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 29, in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol variable display end process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S111
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display termination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S
111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) ) will be carried out. The main CPU 201 is S11
After executing the process 2, the process moves to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S114,
The special symbol variable display end process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 30, in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The special symbol game determination process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S121
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S
121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S122, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S122), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, if it is determined that there is no jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if S122 is NO), the main CPU 201
, the process moves to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the jackpot 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126).
), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), the game state specification parameter setting process (S128), and the transmission reservation process of the jackpot start display command (S12)
9) etc. In addition, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S12
By performing 7) and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. Note that the main CPU 201 is
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 shows the first
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S131, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game.
After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end command transmission reservation processing (
S134) is performed. Note that the special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CP
U201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. The main CPU 201 performs S141
After executing the process, the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. The main CPU 201 performs S142
After executing the process, the time saving management process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 shows the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S151, the process moves to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S152, the counter update process is ended and the process is changed to the time saving management process (Fig. 32
).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 shows the counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151.

In addition, the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in a stacked manner when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state. Incidentally, when shifting to the high probability gaming state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter is set in the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, or C working time saving gaming state.
Indicates the number of times each is executed.

When the transition conditions to the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and/or the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied, a time-saving counter is set for the time-saving gaming state in which the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the time-saving counter reaches 0 ( In the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving counter reaches the set number of time savings (in the case of the addition method), the time saving gaming state may be ended.

In S161, if it is determined that both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S161), the main CPU 201:
The time saving counter update process is ended and the process returns to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S162,
The process moves to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If S163 is YES, the main CPU 20
1, the process moves to S164.

Note that the C time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when a B time saving counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with 2 bits, for example, and when the C-time-saving gaming state is executed overlappingly with the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first, it is set to "time-saving mode = 3".
Furthermore, when the B time saving game state is executed over the time saving game state which is being executed first, "time saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is NO), the main CPU 20
1, the process moves to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S164, the process moves to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If S165 is YES, the main CPU 20
1, the process moves to S166.

The B time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the C working time saving gaming state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S165 is NO), the main CPU 20
1 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S166, the time saving counter update process is ended and the process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S164, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S166, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when executing a plurality of time-saving gaming states in a stacked manner, it is not limited to just stacking two time-saving gaming states, but may execute three or more time-saving gaming states in a stacking manner. In this case, as mentioned above, the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state do not overlap, so the case where three or more time saving gaming states overlap means that the A working time saving gaming state or the B working time saving gaming state and two This corresponds to the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 35 shows the counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
3) is a flowchart illustrating an example of ceiling counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is,
If the probability change flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value,
The ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Fig. 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter.
After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process,
The process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 shows the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. The main CPU 201 performs S181
After executing the process, the process moves to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. Details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (S183 is N
O judgment), that is, if the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. Main CPU2
01, after executing the process of S184, the process moves to S185.

Note that if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (S183 is
In the case of ES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, they should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some kind of problem may occur when executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time saving counter or the time saving counter is 1 or more even though S183 is YES, , abnormality processing such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. In addition, instead of or in addition to this abnormality processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset. The counter, the B time saving counter, and the C time saving counter may be made consistent.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) of the time saving transition command.
)I do. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S191).
.

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and transfers the process to the counter determination process (Fig. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (S191 is YES)
In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (NO in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process in S193, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process in S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. Main CPU
After executing the process of S195, step 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 shows counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S202).
.

In S202, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S202), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and converts the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 36). ). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability change flag is off (S202 is YES)
(S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S206.
Move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (S203 is YES)
(S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the B time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 2, time saving performance, etc. are determined. Main CPU
201 executes the process of S205 and then moves the process to S208.

Note that the number of time saving times set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. Also,
Among the time-saving performance, the winning probability for "normal symbol" is determined by the normal symbol hit determination table (Figure 16).
(see). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (NO in S206), that is, if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving shift process and transfers the process to the counter determination process ( (see Figure 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time saving flag is on (YES determination in S206), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time saving times to be set in the C time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance, etc. are determined. Main CPU
201 executes the process of S207 and then moves the process to S208.

Note that the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is based on the hit type determination table (for example, Figure 1
3) and is determined according to the selection symbol command. In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S211).
.

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

When S211 is YES, the probability change flag is off and, for example, when the time-saving game state B is executed in a state in which the time-saving game state C is executed first (the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value) ), or when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state where the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state has been executed first (if you win the "time saving winning"). do.

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and
The B time saving counter determined in S205 is set. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

If it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S211)
That is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-savings (NO in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of time-savings, the main CPU 201 Finish the setting process and switch to the time-saving migration process (
(see Figure 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is larger than the new number of time saving times (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, the B time saving gaming state may be executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is executed first. If the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly in the current state, the current time saving counter value (i.e. remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number, whichever is greater, will be reset as the new time saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU2
01 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and transfers the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).
Return to

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to manage that two time saving game states are being executed internally in a superimposed manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are being executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is the same as the above two time-saving gaming states that are being executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states is included. Therefore, without managing the fact that two time-saving gaming states are being executed internally (
In other words, when multiple time-saving game states are executed simultaneously (without providing B time-saving counter and C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new time-saving number is set as the new time-saving number. It may also be reset as a time saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is
If 211 is NO, that is, if the non-time-saving gaming state is moved to the B-time-saving gaming state and executed (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or if the non-time-saving gaming state is moved to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is a process that is carried out when executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or C time saving control mode determining process (S2
The number of time saving times and time saving performance determined in step 07) are set. The main CPU 201 is S21
After executing the process 4, the process moves to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. Main C
After executing the process of S215, the PU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 determines that B
It is advisable to perform a process of shifting to a time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 20
In 1, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is started. Based on this, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, B time-saving game It is preferable to perform transition processing to the state. This is because when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made, and while the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation, the other special symbol is variable. This is because when the display is started, the variable display of the other special symbol will no longer be able to benefit from the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of special symbols is not performed in a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in pachinko gaming machines where special symbols can be variably displayed with such long fluctuations, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling fluctuation. As a result, even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation, a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state can be avoided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B-time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B-time-saving gaming state is replaced with the process related to the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state. Although the process is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to this (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to transition to C time saving gaming state
B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state
) may be given priority.

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35). I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, even if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving game state may not be made, but the transition to the B time saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 “
The transition to the B time-saving game state is not made only when the ceiling counter = ceiling value'', but when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter reaches the ceiling value, processing is performed to transition to the B time-saving game state.

Further, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is a transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off.
Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8).
Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko game machine such as the first pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above, , the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the jackpot probability (
If the value is the denominator of (when the variable probability flag is off) multiplied by a specified number (for example, 3.0),
The ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value may be overlooked by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, no matter what setting value is set, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, but by It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the setting value.

[1-6-18. Variations related to time-saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is replaced with the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time-saving gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time-saving gaming state (time-saving hit flag) are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made; When the time saving winning flag is on, the game is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order of transition to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state C The question of whether to separate or share the migration flag is not limited to the above.
Time-saving management processing can be performed with various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time-saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when fluctuation is stopped, the processing at the time of transition is set to give priority to the B-time-saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C-time-saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of fluctuation stop, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation stops, and when the ceiling is reached, it is confirmed that the "time saving hit" is not won, and then the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made. good.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0, and in other cases, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the time-saving counter. It is best not to subtract .

[1-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 40, in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The big prize opening preparation process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S251
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S
251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the counted value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main RA
It is stored in a predetermined area in M203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning hole is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit (S253 is Y
In the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit (if S253 is NO)
, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S88) will be performed. The main CPU 201 is S2
After executing the process of 54, the process moves to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process.
After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S25
6). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major prize opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 131 is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of S259, the process moves to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The big winning opening control process executed by 201 will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S271
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S
271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S272), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S272.
Move to 274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, various settings related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40)
It is determined whether the maximum opening time set in is elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has not elapsed (
If S273 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening control process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2
75) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed again. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing.
After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
The jackpot ending process executed by step 201 will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S281
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281
is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set and various counters (
For example, a process is performed to set or reset the values of a probability change counter, a time saving counter, a symbol confirmed number counter, a round counter, a big winning opening winning counter, etc. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S282, the process moves to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S2
91).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and continues the process in S41 (FIG.
(see 3).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S293 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0".
In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CP
U201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1".
In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201
The process moves to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S29
The process No. 5 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU
201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This S29
The process No. 6 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This S29
Process 7 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing,
The process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, in this example, as shown in the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16),
Random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, and 0 to 79 are used as normal symbol hit determination value data (in case of non-time-saving gaming state). The probability of hitting a normal symbol is
Since it is determined by the number of normal symbol hit judgment value data with respect to the total random number of normal symbol hit determination random numbers, for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600000 msec, in a non-time saving gaming state where time saving control is not executed, whereas in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, for example 1000 msec.
It is executed for a relatively short time (msec). In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S301). Main C
After executing the process in S301, the PU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port. After executing the process in S302, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S30.
Move to 3.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S30.
Move to 4.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. Main CP
After executing the process in S304, U201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process in S305, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (
S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. Then the main CPU
201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed;
If the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, check the settings.
If the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not in a gaming permission state (if NO determination is made in S315)
, the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. In addition, S3
Details of the setting control process No. 16 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is allowed (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited period during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in the main RAM2.
It is stored in the interrupt counter area in the work area of 03. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output.
After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S320, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of S321, the process moves to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S323 and then moves the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S
331), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332).
Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. Setting change processing (S33
After executing 2), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (S
333), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334).
Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. Setting confirmation process (S33
After executing step 4), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process,
Display processing of the currently set setting values is performed. The main CPU 201 is S335
After executing the process, the process moves to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are used. is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S336, the process moves to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). This process (WDT output process) includes reading the WDT clear register address, WD
T clear processing and WDT restart processing are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341 is YES)
In the case of S determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. Main C
After executing the process in S342, the PU 201 moves the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S3
51). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352).
Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201
The setting confirmation process is ended and the process returns to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change process (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as "
Clearing processing (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of the backup area (referred to as "backup area") is performed. Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203.
That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main C
The PU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown,
In this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power cut, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process (S371) at the time of power failure recovery.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is on (S372 is YES)
(in the case of determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power interruption. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3.
Move to 74.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command.
The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (S381). After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S381,
The process moves to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values for normal symbols (random values for determining hit of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. . In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 for normal symbols that are held until the starting conditions for the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4). In the ball passage detection process, whether or not there is a free space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is extracted. It is also determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that no game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391 is Y
(in the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random number for the first special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the first special symbol). Various random numerical values, such as random numerical values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on winnings in the first starting hole 120 is less than four, for example. Main RAM
203 is a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area that holds various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 120 until a starting condition is satisfied; (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). In addition, the main RAM 203 is
In addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), there is also a first special symbol starting storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, it is the upper limit of 4 (S393
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (if S393 is YES)
, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process in S394, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 2 until the first special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied.
03. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28), the random number value extracted in S392 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, perform the hit determination process, etc. Also,
It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the random number value is extracted in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the special symbol hit determination process is started. In view of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform it, for example, around the time before and after the process of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command for the first special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol by 1, variation pattern information for the first special symbol (i.e., variation pattern command for the special symbol), etc. The winning command for the first special symbol that has been reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 detects a game ball.

If it is determined that no game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (S398 is Y
(in the case of ES determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random number for the second special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the second special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winning. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winnings in the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 140 in a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special memory area (1) for holding various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 140 until starting conditions are met. It has a symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). . In addition,
The main RAM 203 stores a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (
In addition to 4), it also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (S400
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (if S400 is YES)
, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the pending number of second special symbols. After executing the process in S401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 2 until the second special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied.
03. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the second special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when a backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the appearance of the display effect that is output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined. The mode of sound production, etc. is determined.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).
The display control circuit 304 receives the message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301.
Based on this, drawing control is performed to display an image in the display area of the display device 7. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).
The accessory control circuit 307 receives the message (accessories request) sent from the sub CPU 301.
Based on this, drive control is performed to operate performance drive motors (not shown) for all or part of the performance accessories forming the performance accessory group 58. When this process is finished, the sub CPU3
01 ends the sub control circuit main processing.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301, as one of the various processes performed in the performance mode determination process, for example, creates a production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "sub variation") of a sub variation production corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "performance pattern"), a pre-read performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern for a pre-read performance (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read performance pattern"), etc. In addition, in the performance mode determination process, for example, the performance mode of a countdown performance that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the performance mode of the B time-saving game state transition performance that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is determined. Processing and the like are also performed to determine various performance aspects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern or a character performance patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation performance, expectations for the result of the special symbol hit determination process change as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the special symbol stops, depending on the sub-variation performance pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, the sub-variable performance patterns include short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc. is included. As mentioned above, the time-saving hits A, B, and C are determined by the special symbol hit determination process (Figure 2
8)) is a reach effect that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). Jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be both a short-time hit and a jackpot.

For example, if the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301
It is preferable to give priority to one of the effects.

The pre-read performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the pre-read determination process. The look-ahead performance is a performance that indicates the level of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is performed when in a pending state (i.e., after winning a prize at the first start opening 120, starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on the winning result). This is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 before the special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead performance, when in the hold state, the look-ahead judgment is performed as time passes (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information that was held in advance), depending on the look-ahead performance pattern that is executed. It is possible to indicate that the level of expectation regarding the outcome of the treatment is maintained or increased.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the special symbol hit judgment process. A look-ahead expected value performance pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process being a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is included. That is, in the look-ahead presentation, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the type of result of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. It is. In addition, in the prefetch effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the prefetch per type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later),
A look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59, which will be described later) is performed. Specific examples of the per-reading type performance pattern, the pre-reading expected value performance pattern, the per-reading type performance pattern determination process, and the pre-reading expected value performance pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table (detailed explanation is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the time saving flag is off (normal gaming state). This sub-variable effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation performance pattern determination table in a gaming state where the time-saving flag is on (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), but the explanation will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A sub-variation effect pattern (indicated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variable performance pattern includes short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E. There is.

The time-saving wins A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving win as described above, and are also reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-fluctuating effect pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit type reach C is a sub-fluctuating effect pattern targeted for pre-reading (the ``pre-reading flag'' column in Figure 15,
(See FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "jackpot" (Figure 1
(see 5). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. This is a form of reach production that makes it difficult to grasp whether there is a Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but is displayed only if it is a jackpot or "time-saving hit". (Figure 15
reference). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C.
Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub CPU 301 uses the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54).
With reference to this, a sub-variation effect pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the determined sub variation effect pattern to be displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a prefetch per-type performance pattern determination process and a prefetch expected value performance pattern determination process, which are performed as the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes the first special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), and the A first sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3), and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) contain various information related to the extracted random number value. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state). It may be made to be carried out, or it may be made to be carried out for the second special symbol.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 includes a first sub-holding area (0) as an area for displaying held images.
The 0th area corresponds to the 0th area, the 1st reservation area corresponds to the 1st sub-reservation area (1), the 2nd reservation area corresponds to the 1st sub-reservation area (2), and the 1st sub-reservation area (3) corresponds to A fourth reservation area corresponding to the third reservation area and the first sub-reservation area (4) is provided.

[1-9-2-1. [Table referenced in pre-reading type performance pattern determination processing]
The table referred to in the prefetch type performance pattern determination process will be explained.

By the way, the format of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed with the determined look-ahead effect type effect pattern includes a time-saving look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a jackpot. This includes a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form that shows the possibility of a short-time hit and a jackpot.

The look-ahead hit type performance pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead look to a time-saving win look-ahead look, or from a common win look-ahead look to a jackpot look ahead look. This is a production pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 55 is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table.
FIG. 55 shows only the prefetch target variation patterns among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a pre-reading type performance pattern determination table.
Note that these tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the per look-ahead performance pattern determination table number determination table in FIG.
The PU 301 determines the prefetch type performance pattern determination table number based on, for example, the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the pre-read per type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is “0E
H” and the number of reservations is “2”, the per look-ahead type performance pattern determination table number is “
22”.

When the prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301
Referring to the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table in FIG. 56, the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined. To be more specific, as shown in the pre-read per-type performance pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for convenience, the "pre-read per type effect pattern determination table number" is
``ASPT number'' and the ``per look-ahead type presentation pattern'' are shown as ``SAS presentation pattern.'' The random number value 1 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "55", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "07H". For example, if the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number 1 is "77", the pre-reading type performance pattern is "16".
H” is determined.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “A” is ,
This indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving win. When a pending image is displayed in the time-saving look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “B” is ,
This indicates that the pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “C” is ,
This indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common win type look-ahead presentation format indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a common winning look-ahead presentation format, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a jackpot.

For example, if the look-ahead performance pattern is determined to be "07H", the common win type look-ahead performance pattern "C" is displayed in the third holding area, and the second look-ahead effect pattern after shifting from the third holding area is displayed.
Also in the hold area, the common winning look-ahead performance form "C" is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common winning look-ahead presentation form "C" changes to the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form "A", and in the first holding area, the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form "A" is displayed.

Further, when the pre-reading per-type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning-type pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third holding area. Then, when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common winning look-ahead performance form "C" is changed to the jackpot look-ahead performance form "C".
In the second holding area and the first holding area after being shifted from the second holding area, the jackpot type look-ahead presentation form “B” is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the pre-read per type performance pattern includes the following a) ~
(e) pattern is included. In addition, in this example, the pattern changes from the jackpot type look-ahead performance form "B" to the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form "A", and the time-saving look-ahead performance form "
Patterns that change from "A" to "B", a large/short hit look-ahead performance pattern, are not included in the look-ahead performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the look-ahead performance pattern.
B) A look-ahead performance pattern for time-saving winnings (for example, a look-ahead performance pattern for a time-saving win) in which a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time it is suspended, and the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter. "09H").
B) A look-ahead jackpot performance pattern in which a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the performance form does not change after that, and the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed (for example, look-ahead winning type performance pattern “17H”) ).
c) At the time of suspension, a common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead win type performance pattern "24H").
d) A look-ahead common winning performance pattern B (for example, a look-ahead winning type performance pattern “12H”) that is displayed in a common win type look-ahead performance form at the time of suspension and then changes to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form.
e) At the time of suspension, the common winning look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and the performance form does not change after that, and the common winning look-ahead performance form is displayed.
For example, the pre-read per type performance pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-reading type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. ) to determine. And sub C
The PU 301 refers to the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and determines the pre-reading type based on the determined pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random value 1 for sub-performance selection. Determine the performance pattern (SAS performance pattern).

In addition, in FIG. 56, at the time of being put on hold, the time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form "A" is displayed,
Thereafter, the pre-reading performance pattern that changes to the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form “B” is not shown, but in this way, the time-saving look-ahead performance form “A” changes to the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form “B”. The sub-CPU 301 may determine the pre-read per type performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form "B" is a jackpot-based look-ahead performance that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a jackpot (that is, it may be a loss), as described above. However, in addition to this, a jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance mode may be displayed that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot confirmation. In this case, the pre-reading type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type effect patterns f) to h).
F) A look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern A in which a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead performance forms (for example, time-saving look-ahead performance form “A”)
, jackpot type look-ahead performance form "B", common winning type look-ahead performance form "C", etc.) are displayed, and then the look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern B changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
H) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead performance forms (for example, time-saving look-ahead performance form “A”)
, common winning look-ahead performance form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then the jackpot look-ahead performance form "C" etc.) is displayed.
A look-ahead jackpot confirmation performance pattern C in which "B" is displayed and then changes to a jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form “A” and the jackpot type look-ahead performance form “B” are shown.
” and the common winning look-ahead presentation form “C”, the common winning look-ahead presentation form “C” has the highest display frequency at the time of suspension, but it is not limited to this. For example, when it is put on hold, the display frequency of the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form "A" may be the highest, and when it is put on hold, the display frequency of the jackpot-like look-ahead presentation form "B" may be the highest. You can do it like this. Furthermore, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the common winning look-ahead effect form "C" may be the lowest.

In addition, in FIG. 56, all “pre-read per type performance pattern determination table numbers
A random number 1 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to "T number)", but the present invention is not limited to this, and random numbers for sub-performance selection are not assigned only to a specific SASPT number (i.e., a specific SASPT number). The distribution rate of the SASPT number may be set to 0 so that the SASPT number is not selected.

[1-9-2-2. [Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process]
Next, a table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be explained.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of a win) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." Also,
FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed according to the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot).

When a pending image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is normally represented by a triangle, may be changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the retained image is a square, and the highest when the retained image is a star.

In addition, when a pending image is displayed as a jackpot-type look-ahead effect, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, may be changed to a color such as "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

Although the details will be described later, in the case where a pending image is displayed as a common winning look-ahead effect that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, the pending image can be used as an expected value for a jackpot, for example. It may be expressed by both the color indicating the level and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving win, or it may be expressed by a dedicated common win system look-ahead presentation form.

A pending image in which look-ahead presentation is performed can change from a presentation form with a relatively low expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value, but the expected value may change from a presentation form with a relatively high expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value. It is preferable not to change to a low performance form. Also, when changing the presentation form of the held image, it is not necessarily necessary to change it one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" or "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow." , for example, it may be changed to "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Further, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the square or blue, which has the lowest expected value, but may start from a circle or red, for example.

In addition, "1" to "4" shown in the remarks (hold correspondence) column of FIG. 57 are as in FIG. 56.
The first to fourth reservation areas are shown, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of notes (holding support) in FIG. 57, " 0
” to “5” indicate the high expected value for winning (time-saving winning, jackpot). for example,
The above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", and the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1".
", the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", and the above "circle" and "red" It corresponds to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (hold support) column of FIG. 57, " 0
” to “5” are referred to as expected value levels “0” to “5”.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of win) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Similarly, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a loss, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is
As shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. 58, it is determined based on, for example, the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Random value 2 for sub production selection
is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is shown for convenience.
It is omitted.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". . For example, if the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area. The expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, if the look-ahead expected value production pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, the expected value level is "2" in the second holding area, and the expected value level is changed from the second holding area to the first holding area. When shifting to the area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the sub CPU 301 selects the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58). Refer to ), and enter the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub-effect selection.
Based on this, a look-ahead expected value production pattern is determined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value performance pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate. It is.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose", the selection rate of look-ahead expected value production patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) will be increased, etc. Although the distribution is biased, the distribution is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, by distributing the distribution evenly.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to a specific "ahead expected value performance pattern". It is also possible to not allocate the random value 2 for sub-effect selection only to `` (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific ``look-ahead expected value effect pattern'' to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 shows the sub CPU3
1 is an example of a flowchart showing a prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by 01.
Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (if NO in S3001), the sub CPU 30
1 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (if S3001 is YES),
The sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target is currently pending.
That is, it is determined whether or not a prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold. If there are multiple pending images, look-ahead effects may be performed on multiple pending images, but in this embodiment,
The prefetch effect is performed only for one reserved image.

If a look-ahead effect is being executed for the current hold (if S3002 is NO)
, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not executed for the current hold (YES in S3002), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the fluctuation pattern information received with the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (S3003 is N
In the case of O determination), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (S300
3), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In addition, in this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the upper limit number that can be reserved. If it is a prefetch target (if S3003 is YES),
It may be determined whether the number of reservations is greater than the number of reservations including pre-read targets. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination processing. In this process, the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined by referring to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination processing. In this process, with reference to the look-ahead per-type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56),
A per-read-ahead type performance pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, this is not limited to this, and information on winning or losing special symbols can be transferred from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU.
301, a "time saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is “time-saving hit” or “big hit” (S300
7 is YES), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of winning) determination process. In this process, the look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) shown in FIG.
, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of winning). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) shown in FIG.
, and determine the look-ahead expected value performance pattern (in case of loss). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading effects, examples of expansion of pre-reading effects]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, it is not only interesting to see whether the form of the pending image changes to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect or a time-saving look-ahead effect;
It is possible to change the expected value level of jackpot (jackpot, time-saving win), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been seen before. Note that the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, but may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, the form of the reserved image performed as a pre-reading effect (for example, the first sub-reserved area (4) to
Regarding the format of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (1), the first starting port 1
20, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the variation pattern (Figure 5
4, for example, see “03H” and “0EH”), and a variable pattern in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (see, for example, “06H” and “11H” in Fig. 54). The former probability is higher (for example, see Figure 15).
. That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead performance while suppressing a decrease in the expected value of a hit.
It is possible to increase interest.

Note that the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a gaming state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, normal gaming state, low probability time-saving gaming state), it is possible to win a "time-saving hit" in the special symbol winning determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead performance is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead performance is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when executing the C-time-saving gaming state over the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. In any case where the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the possibility that the number of time saving times will increase is low. Therefore, by making sure that the player does not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving win" in the A-time-saving gaming state, the disappointment caused to the player by winning the "time-saving win" is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and it is necessary to ensure that the look-ahead effect is not performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state and the high-accuracy low time-saving game state. It's okay. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this example, FIGS.
~ As can be seen from FIG. 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern, it executes the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern and does not execute the jackpot type reaching. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the pre-reading performance using the pre-reading jackpot performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot-based reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-based reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and the look-ahead time short hit performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56) ), and a look-ahead common winning performance pattern (for example, look-ahead performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56)
No matter which of the above is executed, the sub CPU 301 uses the common reach (for example, the sub variable effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as the sub variable effect pattern.
”) may be executed.

Further, a production pattern may be provided in which a short-time winning type reach is executed, and after a loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving winning type reaching, a jackpot type reaching is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not a jackpot-type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when common reach E is executed in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the starting information for which the look-ahead effect has been executed, common reach C and After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to common reach C is executed,
Does not shift to jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the presentation common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the presentation common to the short time winning reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is executed, the shift to the time-saving hit type reach C does not occur.

By the way, in this embodiment, the prefetch effect is performed only for one pending image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 will Do not perform look-ahead effects. Note that even if the machine is a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of pending images, if a jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect.

For example, an arbitrary hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold whose variable display of special symbols starts after this first hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") ), and if a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H" in Fig. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect in this second suspension will be meaningless. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

In addition, even if the first reservation is a jackpot reservation (a reservation from which a jackpot is derived), the first reservation
If the prefetch effect is not executed for the second hold, the prefetch effect may or may not be executed for the second hold.

Further, even when a fake jackpot look-ahead performance (for example, look-ahead hit type performance pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to perform the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving look-ahead performance (for example, the look-ahead performance pattern "05H" in Figure 56) is being executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It's okay. This is because even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the first pachinko game machine does not include a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Even when the winning look-ahead performance is being executed, the jackpot look-ahead performance or the time-saving win look-ahead performance may be performed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit.
) is executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, as a sub-variation production pattern, for example, the first starting opening 120
If the player wins a prize and the start information is put on hold, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the pre-read effect regarding this hold.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), when the jackpot display mode is derived, If there is a hold, the sub CPU
301 may make it possible not to execute the pre-read performance for the specific hold after the end of the jackpot game state.

Also, when the variable display of special symbols is finished and the jackpot display mode is derived, the main CP
If the start information determined to be "time-saving" based on the look-ahead determination made by U201 is suspended (this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in this paragraph), even if this specific suspension is "time-saving" Even if the main CPU 201 is on hold, the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving gaming state based on the "time-saving winning" after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving gaming states are not executed in duplicate when the time-saving gaming states overlap, and if the control is made to the A-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is set to "time-saving winning". ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead performance pattern and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern. Here, first, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 60, in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), the display area 7a of the display device 7 includes a first
A holding area 411 to a fourth holding area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is
This area corresponds to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub-CPU 301
holds the holding areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which holding information is stored,
A pending image indicated by a triangle (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pending image") is displayed. Further, if the reservation information is not stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub-CPU 301
The reserved image is not displayed, and only the frame of the reserved area is displayed.

In FIG. 60(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that reservation information has been newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white (expected value level "0"). The color of the held image that is displayed is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 60(b) is changed. This is an image showing that the color changes from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 60(c) is , is an image showing that the color changes from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 60(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(e), and the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 60(e) is changed. , is an image showing that the color changes from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th area 410.

Furthermore, the color of the pending image indicating the expected value for the jackpot (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, the jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance form can be used to change the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a prefetch effect that changes the effect form. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.

[1-10-2. Specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern]
Next, a specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. Note that the look-ahead time saving per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6A" in FIG.
Corresponds to "H". Furthermore, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 stores the first reservation area 411 to
The form (for example, shape) of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is displayed differently depending on the expected value for time saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shapes of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular (expected value level "0"), and the shapes shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are triangular (expected value level "0"). The shape of the retained image is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 61(b) is , 3rd
This is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the reservation area 413.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 61(c) is , second
This is an image showing that the shape changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the reservation area 412.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 61(d) is , 1st
This image shows that the shape changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the reservation area 411.

FIG. 61(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 61(e) is , 0th
This is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to area 410.

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for time saving is not necessarily
It is not necessary to change when the hold is shifted, and for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the following look-ahead effect may be used. It may also be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a short-time winning look-ahead look to a jackpot look-ahead look.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win-based look-ahead performance to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead common winning performance pattern]
Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 62, in which a pre-reading effect is performed using a common pre-reading effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading per-type effect pattern.

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits that indicate the possibility of both jackpots and time-saving hits. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a pre-read effect type to a pre-read effect type jackpot type. Changes in the look-ahead production format for common winning systems include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving hit, jackpot), and a change to make it clear whether the type of win is a jackpot or a time-saving hit. is included. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to “43H” in FIG. 57.

In this example, as a common win-based look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is expressed by displaying.

In FIG. 62(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 operates in the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 41.
The format (e.g. color and shape) of the pending image shown in 4 is determined as a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit).
It is displayed differently depending on the expected value. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or when the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle,
The expected value for a short hit increases in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
The form of the held image shown in is a white triangle (expected value level “0”), and the form of the held image shown in the third held area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level “2”). .

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 62(b) is , second
When shifted to the reservation area 412, the yellow pentagon becomes a green hexagon (expected value level "3")
This is an image showing the change.

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 62(c) is , 1st
When shifted to the hold area 411, it changed from a green hexagon (a common winning look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``3'') to a rainbow triangle (a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``5''). This is an image showing that.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates the expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, Fig. 62(d
), it is possible to understand that the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5") It is something.

In this way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process.
Any one of the look-ahead time-saving performance pattern that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that shows the expected value for a jackpot, and the look-ahead common winning performance pattern that shows the expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). It is configured to be able to perform look-ahead effects based on patterns. Then, when a look-ahead effect is executed using the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, the player is given an interesting idea of whether the pending image will change into a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Note that the format of the pending image that shows the expected value for time savings does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star." Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → red triangle (jackpot type look-ahead performance form)" or "green hexagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → It may be changed to a triangular star (a time-saving look-ahead production form). In addition, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to start from the blue square with the lowest expected value.
For example, it may be started from the red circle.

Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 62, the common winning system look-ahead performance format is changed to change the expected value from which any winning (jackpot or time-saving hit) is derived, or to change the expected winning from an unknown state to a jackpot. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU 301 may execute the prefetch effect shown below, for example. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
・Changes from the common winning look-ahead performance form to the jackpot look-ahead performance form, and after that,
A look-ahead performance that changes to a big win confirmation look-ahead performance format.

[1-10-4. Variations of the common winning look-ahead production format]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common winning look-ahead presentation form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving win does not necessarily have a color that indicates the expected value for the jackpot.
The present invention is not limited to a form in which both the shape and the shape indicating the expected value for time saving are expressed. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win-based look-ahead performance format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both jackpots and time-saving hits, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for both jackpots and short-time wins, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance format in the future. Players can now play games with a sense of anticipation, and their interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, with pending images changing from the dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to the jackpot look-ahead performance form. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a process in which Note that the look-ahead per-type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

Further, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are "07H", "27H", and "43H" in FIG.
, or "63H", and the look-ahead expected value production patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

In FIGS. 63(a) and 64(a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
, a normal pending image without prefetching effect is displayed, and the third pending area 41
No pending images are displayed in the third and fourth pending areas 414, and only frames are displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIGS. 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the pending image shown in the third holding area 413 is a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form, and is, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and the dedicated common winning system that was displayed in the third reservation area 413 in FIG. 63(b) This is an image showing that the prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing the form.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and the dedicated This is an image showing that the common winning look-ahead presentation form has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 in the same form.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 63(c) is , 1st
When shifted to the holding area 411, a red triangle (
This is an image showing that the expected jackpot value level has changed to "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the pending status is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 64(c) is This is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it changes from the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form to a white circle (expected value level of time saving per win "4").

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form, the dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form can be changed to the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form. It is possible to make the player find it interesting to see how the game will change, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output from the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "
These are various signals of "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2", and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 65, a signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, and CH2
A signal for "door/frame open" is output from CH3 to CH10, and "external information 1" is output from CH3 to CH10.
” to “external information 8” are output, CH11 outputs a “prize ball information 2” signal, and CH12 outputs a “security” signal. Note that the conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine is shown below.
The signal of "prize ball information 1" will be explained as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening 131 (FIG. 4
For example, if a game ball wins in the starting hole (see FIG. 4), ten prize balls are paid out, and if a game ball wins in the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). For example, three prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 waits, for example, 120 ms at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal.
During ec, a signal of "prize ball information 1" is output. Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, a signal of "prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out.
Outputting for msec is also just an example, and the output timing and output time of the "prize ball information 1" signal can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) Trigger for release, "Security" signal (indicated as "Security signal" in Figure 67)
2 is a table showing output times and notes.

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small winnings, for convenience, FIG.
It also describes abnormal winning errors in the large winning opening for small winnings. Moreover, in FIG. 67, the big winning hole 131 is described as the big winning hole for jackpot.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in Figure 67 but are determined to be errors include:
For example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error occurs when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, and the solenoid monitoring sensor is not discharged inside the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot or big winning opening for small winning). This corresponds to the abnormal error in entering and discharging the large winning hole when there is a game ball or there is a prize in the large winning hole when the large winning hole is not opened, and the vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot, and the probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In addition, abnormality in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot, will be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure this.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6)
1 (see FIG. 6). Sub CPU that received fraud detection related information
301 executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The main CPU
The control by the CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the winning slot, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below,
For example, when 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning slot abnormal prize winning error" from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6 for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, FIG.
This will be explained with reference to 8. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output outside the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. Output. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small wins). be done.

In this way, by changing the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, the signal can be received by an external device (for example, a hall computer 1) that can receive the signal.
86 (see FIG. 6) and the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status at the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is other than)
It is the same as the signal output to Similarly, during small hit game control processing (during low-accuracy time-saving game state)
The signal output to is the same as the signal output during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), and the signal output during the small-hit gaming control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). The signal is
This is the same signal that is output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small hits), and the signal that is output during the small-hit game control process (during high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) is This is the same signal that is output during a non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a jackpot or a small win). That is, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) performs the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small win game control process different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not in progress, the small win can be achieved at the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be determined by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the explanation about the first pachinko game machine mentioned above, under the control of the main CPU,
It is possible to control the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state (the functions of the A working time saving gaming state, the functions of the B working time saving gaming state, and the functions of the C working time saving gaming state are installed). Although explained as a premise, it is not limited to this. For example, only one function (for example, the function of the A time saving gaming state) is installed among the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the functions of the B working time saving gaming state, and the functions of the C time saving gaming state, and the other functions ( For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the function B for the time-saving gaming state and the function for the time-saving gaming state C). In addition, two of the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state (for example, the A working time saving gaming state function, and the B working time saving gaming state function or the C working time saving function) It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is equipped with only the function of the game state) and not equipped with other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the time-saving game state C).

In addition, for example, in a pachinko game machine called an ST machine, after the end of the jackpot game state, 1
In a pachinko gaming machine in which the probability change flag is set to on with a probability of 00%, even if it is configured so that none of the functions of the A time-saving gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state function, and the C time-saving gaming state function are installed. good.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, regarding the game board unit and electrical configuration,
There are some differences from the first pachinko gaming machine.

In the following, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine will be explained. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

Furthermore, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko game machine, The explanation shall be made using different symbols and step numbers than the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example, A pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting hole and the second starting hole. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a game area 1105.
is formed.

Note that the various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) are the same as the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 4). Although there are some things in common, I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, and a guide rail 11.
10, a center accessory 1115 located approximately in the center of the gaming area 1105, a first starting opening 1120, a general winning opening 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, and a second starting opening. Mouths 1140A, 1140B and ordinary electric accessory unit 1145
, a small winning unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 1010. In addition, LE
The D unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 includes an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (no reference numerals).
Consisted of. The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 is placed in the left side area 1.
106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

At the rear side of the stage 1118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 11 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 1119 enters the first starting opening 1120.
It is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. Mouth 1
It is now possible to win (pass) 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, the first starting port switch 1121
(See FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first starting port 112.
It may be possible to win a prize of 0. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting port 1120,
A first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize).

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007,
The game balls are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). When a game ball enters the general winning hole 1122, the general winning hole switch 1
123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the general winning hole 11
The number of prize balls that are paid out based on the winning of game balls on 22 is not limited to four.

Further, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but the general winning hole 1122 is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected by the passing gate switch 1127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The suspended normal symbol start information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131 and a jackpot jackpot jackpot 1.
Jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 that detects winning (passage) of game balls to 131
(See FIG. 70 described below) and a special electric accessory 1133 are integrated into a unit body. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is located in the right area 1107 when passing through the gate unit 1125.
It is located below.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 1115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. Big winning opening count switch 1132 for jackpot (see Figure 70 below)
When it is detected that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is the special electric accessory 1134 that opens the jackpot jackpot 11.
31 and an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot 113 for jackpots.
A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass through) the game ball into a prize, and a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win (pass through) the game ball. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot jackpot 113
1 is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over a plurality of rounds in which the game moves from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting ports are a second starting port 1140A and a second starting port 1140B.
are arranged in the gaming area 1105, and these second starting ports 1140A, 1140B are
In either case, a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize)
It becomes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and/or the second starting opening 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Second starting port 114
Even if the game ball lands on either of 0A and 1140B, it triggers the second special symbol hit determination process.

The second starting port 1 is activated by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later).
When winning (passing) of a game ball to 140A, 1140B is detected, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the second starting port 1140A, 114
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 0B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131, there are two vertically flowing paths 1107a and 1107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 and flows further downstream, for example, hits the branch nail 11 shown in FIG. 69.
08, the water is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes. However, most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a are at the second starting port 11.
40A is not essential; for example, it may be configured such that winning at the second starting port 1140A is hardly expected, or when a predetermined number of game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a is configured. The configuration may be such that a prize can be won with an expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5). In addition, the game balls that flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but did not enter the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 1145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the downward flow path 1107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 1147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 1147 is in an open state where it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting opening 1140B, and the second starting opening 114
It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter 0B.
Note that instead of the general power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, such as a blade member, called a so-called electric tulip, may be used. In addition, the movable member is
Including vane type, door type, protruding plate type, etc.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 1150 has a large winning opening 1151 for small winning and a large winning opening 1151 for small winning.
A large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting winning (passage) of a game ball to a small winning opening, a small winning shutter 1153 that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and a small winning shutter 1153 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions. It is a unit body that integrates a small hit solenoid 1154 that can be operated.

The small winning shutter 1153 opens the small winning large winning opening 115 by moving forward and backward in the front and back direction.
An open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) 1, and a large winning opening 1151 for small winnings.
A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a game ball.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 1151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 1145 in the lower flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. In order to win the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side before reaching the big winning opening 1151,
It becomes difficult (or impossible) to win a prize in the small winning big prize opening 1151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 and the big winning opening for small winning 1151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 includes various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131) for the objects fired toward the gaming area 1105.
, general winning hole 1122, etc.) is for discharging game balls that have not won a prize out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 1122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, as described above. This back unit has a sub control circuit 1300
(See FIG. 70 described below) includes a group of performance accessories 1058 such as movable accessories.
The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Figure 70
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. circuit 1204
and a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 is a WDT that monitors operations.
(watchdog timer) and other functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU12
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 has I/Os that are communicably connected to various devices, etc.
It also includes a port 1205 and a command output port 1206 connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reservation display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reservation display section 1165,
Second special symbol reservation display section 1166, probability change notification display section 1167, time saving notification display section 11
68, a general electricity solenoid 1148, a special electricity solenoid 1135, a small hit solenoid 1154, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 12
00 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes a first starting port switch 1121 and a second starting port switch 1.
141A, 1141B, passing gate switch 1127, big winning opening count switch 1132 for jackpot, general winning opening switch 1123, and big winning opening counting switch 11 for small winning
52 etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is sent to I/O port 1.
It is output to the main control circuit 1200 via 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are transferred to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, a third party other than the gaming hall administrator may use the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1.
176 is preferably not easily accessible.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work R
AM1303, display control circuit 1304, audio control circuit 1305, LED control circuit 1306
, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. Sub control circuit 1
300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200.
Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. In addition,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, and an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AM) that amplifies audio signals.
(referred to as P), etc.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC is sub-C
In response to a sound generation command from the PU 1301, one sound data is selected from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 1082 that makes the game balls fire. A firing device 1006 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is connected to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200 and the sub control circuit 130).
0, payout/emission control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. The second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but in the following,
Descriptions related to setting functions will be omitted.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a probability-variable control but time-saving control is executed. The main CPU 120
1, it is possible to proceed with the game in any one of these gaming states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state.
The sub CPU 1301 determines the normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left).
For example, control for displaying in the display area of the display device 1007 is executed.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 71 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in .

The special symbol hit determination table is used for special symbol hit determination processing (S1034 in FIG. 78, which will be described later).
), i.e., the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1
A table that is referred to when determining a "time-saving hit,""smallhit,""bighit," or "loss" by lottery based on random numbers for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball enters a prize in 140A or 1140B. It is. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "small win", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this example, the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
Extracted from. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, "
The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined for "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined for "jackpot" and this The relationship between the corresponding jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination.
decided on. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with the data, relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “small hit” and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “jackpot” The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. Ru.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 120
1, it is determined that it is a "time saving win", and the win/loss judgment value data is determined as "time saving winning judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it has not been won. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." In addition, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 120
1 is determined to be a "loss" and the determination value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201
The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". Also, the first
If the probability change flag is on during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and changes the determination value data to " Jackpot judgment value data” is determined. Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201
It is determined that the time saving is successful, and the judgment value data is determined to be the ``time saving judgment value data.'' In addition, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data." In addition, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is 22118~
22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is 22323 to 65535.
In either case, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201
The judgment value data is determined to be the "time saving judgment value data". Also, the second
If the probability change flag is on during the special symbol hit determination process and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit" and saves the determination value data. Decide on "small hit judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is 22118 to 2.
2968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is
"Loss judgment value data" is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process of the second special symbol).
), other judgment value data excluding jackpot judgment value data and loss judgment value data (for example,
It is assigned to the short-time winning judgment value data and the small winning judgment value data). Also, from the predetermined value to the end (for example, 22 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol)
323 to 65535) are assigned to the loss judgment value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( or larger), it becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is overlapped, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will actually change. This will make it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving win" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in .

The special symbol determination table is the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140
When selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball lands on B and the aforementioned win/loss judgment value data. This is a table that is referred to (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z1" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
For example, the main CPU 1201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. In other words, if the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main C
PU1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "z3" as the symbol designation command.
zA3”. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is between 2 and 9,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 60~
99, the main CPU 1201 issues "z6" as the selection symbol command.
, and select "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
For example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 120
1 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201
"z8" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process,
For example, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to open the small winning large winning opening 1151 (
(See FIG. 69) is executed so that a game ball can enter (pass) a prize or enter an open state where it is easy, and a prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
For example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the second special symbol random number is between 30 and 59, the main C
The PU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
For example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of the symbol random number value of the second special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201
"z14" is selected as the selected symbol command, and "zA11" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In this example, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 71), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 71) is determined. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Note that in the second pachinko gaming machine, although the explanation is omitted, the main RO of the main control circuit 1200
M1202 stores a special symbol stopping mode determining table corresponding to the special symbol stopping mode determining table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. Further, in the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (Fig. 1
Regarding the decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to 2(B)), the sub control circuit 13
It is stored in the program ROM 1302 of 00.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a winning type determination table stored in . The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following S10 in Figure 78
36 when executing the winning type determination process). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving hit display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then
Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the win game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore,
When the probability change flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data may not be assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, that is, the winning determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, the selection symbol command is “z10
”, the main CPU 1201 selects the large winning opening 1 for small winning as the mode of the small winning game state.
151 (see FIG. 69) is determined to be opened once. The result of the special symbol hit judgment process is “
If it is a small win, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 1164, sets the determined number of openings of the small win large prize opening 1151, and It becomes possible to control the winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", after the end of the small win game state, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU1
201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state, and as an aspect of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the variable probability flag of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the number of rounds with probability variable It is decided to set it to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state.
Round, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds. In addition, as for the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Also, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z13", the main CPU1
In 201, the number of rounds is 4 and 1, respectively, as the jackpot game state.
Set to 0. In addition, as for the mode of the subsequent gaming state, in either case, it is decided to set only the time-saving flag of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON. Further, the number of times to save time is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control the time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (
The time saving performance (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state.

Further, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201
Neither the winning gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state are set. That is,
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 73.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the random number value for jackpot judgment (performs win/loss judgment), and the winning/losing (“time-saving hit”, “small hit”, “big hit” or “loss”) is determined.
Determine. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. The selected symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing judgment value data, and the type of display mode (for example,
The type of time-saving hit and the type of jackpot are determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6").
Or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, if you win the "jackpot" but you don't win the "jackpot" (
This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to being at a disadvantage compared to the case where the player wins the "time saving prize".

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 74 and 75 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. Main CPU
1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. determine the fluctuation pattern of The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S1037 in FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 74, the main C
The PU 1201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a prefetch effect if the prefetch flag is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may also make the determination.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or a low-accuracy time-saving game state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the prefetch flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of special symbol,
It is determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in Figure 75, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 74. The expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time is larger than that in the determined case. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a low start, the second special symbol is approximately 6000, for example.
Variable display is performed over an extremely long period of 00 msec (for example, long variations A to C).
On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection for each set value, the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined can be made different. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 74) for low start, and for example, in the high accuracy time saving game state, the high accuracy In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figures 74 and 75 indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, although the explanation is omitted for the second pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine,
The main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 18). (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 86), etc.) ), below, including the same process as the process performed in the first pachinko game machine, the step numbers are changed,
The special symbol control process will be explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first performs the second
Load the control state number of the special symbol. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process.
Then, the main CPU 1201 determines that the pending number of the first special symbol is “0” for a certain period of time or more.
”, the transmission reservation process for the demonstration display command for the first special symbol is performed, and if the number of reservations for the second special symbol is “0” for a certain period of time or more, the demonstration display command for the second special symbol is Perform transmission reservation processing. Note that the demo display command scheduled for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process (S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
(see) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives a demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a demonstration display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which left-handed playing is the regular gaming mode, and in the gaming state (
For example, in a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, and a low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols.
For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1004.
Move to.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. The main CPU 1201 is S
After executing the process of 1003, the process moves to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1004, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1007.
Move to.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
201 executes the process of S1006 and then moves the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S1007, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1.
Move to 009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
201 executes the process of S1009 and then moves the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1010, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S1011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1.
Move to 012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. Main CPU1
After executing the process of S1012, 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable that steps 1001 to S1012) be performed within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, S1003 and S100 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76)
6. The special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1009 and S1012 will be explained. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, the special symbol management process is S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process.
When the special symbol management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is the processing target. becomes.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S
1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S1021 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S102
1), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023.
Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S102.
Move to 4.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The process 1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
If the control state number of the special symbol is not “2”, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1.
Move to 026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This S
The process 1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This S
Processing 1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot termination processing. This S102
The process No. 8 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, if the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004, and returns the process to S1003.
If called in 006, the process returns to S1007, if called in S1009, returns to S1010, and if called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 78, in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 1201 will be explained. Figure 78 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S10
31), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
If the determination in S1031 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is NO) (judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10
32), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1033, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination process is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) and using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, a jackpot, or a loss. It is determined whether there is. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the small winning flag is turned off at the start of the small winning gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

In the above special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time-saving hit, small hit, jackpot,
This is a process of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to (or loss). In this process, referring to the special symbol determination table (see Figure 72), using the symbol random value of the special symbol,
The above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the random value for reach determination or/and the random number for performance selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In game states where right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see FIG. 75) ), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S1037, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined.
It is determined as the variation time of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1024) will be performed. After executing the process in S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. The main CPU 1201 performs S1040
After executing the process, the process moves to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1041, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1.
Move to 042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to sub control circuit 1300.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
4, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 will be explained. FIGS. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S10
51), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display termination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
If S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value.
After executing the process in S1052, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10
53), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77 ) will be carried out. Main CPU1201
After executing the process of S1054, the process moves to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process in S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S10.
Move to 56.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process in S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 executes special symbol hit determination processing (S in FIG.
1034) is a small hit.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (in the case of YES determination in S1057), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. Main CPU1
201 executes the process of S1058, and then moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 executes special symbol hit determination processing (S1059 in FIG.
1034) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot (if S1059 is YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S1060, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed variably (S1061
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (S1
061), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. Main CPU1
201 executes the process of S1063 and then moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. The main CPU 1201 is S10
After executing the process of 64, the process moves to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1065, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol.
”. After executing the process in S1067, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1.
Move to 068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1068, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. The main CPU 1201 performs S1069
After executing the process, the special symbol variable display end process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, S102 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77)
5, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 will be explained. FIGS. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S10
71), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
If S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. In addition, the main CPU120
1, when the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, if it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating a small hit (if S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
1201 performs the process of S1075 and then moves the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process in S1075, the main CPU 120
1 also performs processing for clearing various flags and various counters, such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process (S1077) of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151), and the external terminal board 1184. Jackpot signal set processing (S107
8), the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), the process of setting parameters for specifying the gaming state (S1080), and the process of reserving transmission of the jackpot start display command (
Processes such as S1081) are performed. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1026) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, S1 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82)
The special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 at 074 will be explained. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S1092, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss,
The main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 84, in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The big prize opening preparation process executed by the PU 1201 will be explained. FIG. 84 shows the second
It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S11
01 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
If the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning hole opening number counter (big winning hole opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 1151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit (S1103
is determined as YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104
) and switching the control state number, the jackpot ending process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is finished. Main CPU12
01 executes the process of S1104 and then moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (
S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to sub control circuit 1300. After the processing in S1106, the main CPU 120
1 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit (S110
3), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S1107, the main CPU 1201 executes the process in S1107.
Move to 1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened.
In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The big prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. The main CPU 1201 is S110
After executing the process of 8, the process moves to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning)
), the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls in the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls when the grand prize opening is won, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes.
After executing the process in S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 1131 for jackpot and the big winning hole 1151 for small winning. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is performed. After executing the process in S1110, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111
) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. Main CP
After executing the process in S1111, U1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1112, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 85, in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The big prize opening control process executed by the PU 1201 will be explained. FIG. 85 shows the second
It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S11
21), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
If S1121 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 opens the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot).
, it is determined whether the number of game balls won in the small winning jackpot 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter (for example, big winning hole count switch 1132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70 for both) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole is used. etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 115 for small winning)
1) If it is determined that the number of winning game balls is not the maximum number of winning balls (S1122 is NO)
(in the case of determination), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number (S1122
is determined as YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 opens the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot).
, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the small winning jackpot 1151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

In S1123, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning)
) if it is determined that the maximum opening time has not elapsed (if S1123 is NO),
The main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1123, the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1 for small winning)
151) has elapsed (YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 opens the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot).
, closes the small winning jackpot 1151). The main CPU 1201 performs S1124
After executing the process, the process moves to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (
By performing S1125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again. After executing the process in S1125, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1126, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 86, in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The jackpot termination process executed by the PU 1201 will be explained. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, this jackpot end process is S1 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target.
When called at 028, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S11
31), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
If the determination in S1131 is YES), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, you can set or reset the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, number of times the big winning hole is opened). A process is performed to set or reset the values of counters, large winning opening winning counters, ceiling counters, etc.). In addition, both the special symbol suspension flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is set on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set on. As a result, the ceiling counter will not be updated in the high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is on. After the main CPU 1201 executes the process of S1132,
The process moves to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. Main CPU12
After executing the process of S1133, 01 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small win rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the first starting hole is set in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 114
6 is activated to increase the frequency of opening the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 will not be in the open state, so the frequency with which the second starting port 1140B will be in the open state in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that in the game where the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state.
Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 1151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), three
Not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/2 (approximately) derived, but also a super fast fluctuation ( For example, since a variable display time of 1000 msec) is executed, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is different from other game states (for example, normal game state, high accuracy time saving game state, low accuracy time saving game state) ). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is in an open state due to the execution of electric support control,
Most of the game balls that were hit to the right and were distributed to the downward flow path 1107b entered the second starting port 1.
I ended up winning 140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. The game ball that was hit to the right and distributed to the upper downward flow path 1107a is the second
For example, three prize balls are paid out when winning the starting hole 1140A, but the second starting hole 11
40A, only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper downward flow path 1107a win prizes. In this way, in a game state where time-saving control is executed, the game value paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.)
The expected value of is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered a regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-hit game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is changed. When drawn out, the normal electric accessory 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140B, thereby potentially opening the large winning opening 1151 for small winning. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), so if the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, Even if it does, the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than in the game state in which time saving control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived.
In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

In addition, the third pachinko gaming machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 2010 also has a protective glass 4 like the first pachinko game machine.
3 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, and a guide rail 21.
10, a center accessory 2115 located approximately in the center of the gaming area 2105, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general winning port 2122, and a passing gate unit 212.
5, a special electric accessory unit 2130, a normal electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 has a guide rail 2
110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 is placed in the left side area 2.
106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

At the back side of the stage 2118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 21 into which game balls can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 2119 enters the first starting opening 2120.
It is configured to be emitted directly above the Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. Mouth 2
It is now possible to win (pass) 120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, the first starting port switch 2121 (
(see FIG. 88, which will be described later). In addition, the game ball hit to the right is the first starting port 2120.
It may be possible to win a prize. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and the game ball hit to the left may be the second
It may be possible to win a prize at the starting opening 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007,
They are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes through) the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out.
The number of prize balls that are paid out based on the winning of game balls on 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted,
The extracted starting information is retained up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Also,
The passage gate unit 2125 has a left side area 210 instead of or in addition to the right side area 2107.
6 may be arranged.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131,
It is a unit body that integrates a special electric accessory 2133. Special electric accessory unit 2130
is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this,
In place of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win a prize is arranged, or a grand prize opening in which a game ball can win a prize is arranged above the center accessory 2115. You can do it like this.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. The big winning slot 2 is set by the big winning slot count switch 2132 (see Figure 88 described later).
When it is detected that a game ball has landed on 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. however,
The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. It is configured to be able to shift to a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state through the first route is to pay out a large amount of game balls as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and a second starting port 2140.
It is configured such that the state can be changed to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize. In addition,
In place of the above-mentioned ordinary power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, and a V winning opening 2151 that can be opened and closed.
An attacker 2152, a V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening/closing prize opening 2151, and a game inside the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. A V attacker count switch 2153 that detects that a ball has entered, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 can pass, and an opening/closing winning port 2151
A game ball enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 from a V winning hole switch 2156 that detects that the game ball enters (passes through) the V winning hole 2155, and a game ball enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning hole 2151. A loss opening 2157 through which game balls that did not enter the V winning opening 2155 can enter (pass through) among the game balls that have been played, and a V shutter 21 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155.
58, a V-shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V-shutter 2158 to open and close the V-winning port 2155, and a locking member that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V-winning device 2150. 2160. In addition, the V winning device 2150 is
It may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( (See FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. And V Attacker 2
While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of 152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning prize device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. V winning device 21 by V attacker count switch 2153
50, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and calculates the value of the V attacker prize counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. to add. When the V Attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the maximum time that the opening/closing winning slot 2151 can be opened (for example, 1800 msec
) has not elapsed, the V attacker 215 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154.
2 is activated and the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens,
The release control of the V attacker 2152 is continued. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state through the second route, the first round will be played by V attacker 2.
152 from the closed state to the open state, for example, a round game may be executed in which the big prize opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state during the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V prize opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V
The number of attackers opened in the prize opening and in the jackpot game state may be one each. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133 is opened.
When the game ball enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). Loss mouth 2157
The game balls that have passed through are ejected outside the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 2155 by the operation of a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later), and
A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the winning hole 2155. In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and the V winning device 2150
It is configured such that it can hold, for example, only one game ball out of the game balls that have entered the inside of the game ball. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

Further, the locking member 2160 is held for a certain period of time (for example, 3
000 msec), the game ball is unlocked by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it is a losing opening 2157.
pass through. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 includes various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150,
This is for discharging game balls that have not won or entered any of the general winning slots 2122, etc., out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Figure 88
is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), and an initial reset circuit 220.
4 and a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 is a WDT that monitors the operation.
It also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. Main CPU22
01 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 has I/Os that are communicably connected to various devices, etc.
It also includes a port 2205 and a command output port 2206 connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165,
Second special symbol reservation display section 2166, time saving notification display section 2168, general electricity solenoid 21
48, a special electric solenoid 2135, a V attacker solenoid 2154, a V shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like.
Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes a first starting port switch 2121 and a second starting port switch 2.
141, passage gate switch 2127, big winning opening count switch 2132, V attacker count switch 2153, V winning opening switch 2156, and general winning opening switch 2123 are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting key 217 that is operated when changing or checking setting values.
4. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like is connected that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 in response to an operation by the administrator of the gaming hall.
In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 is
It may also be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, a third party other than the person in charge of the gaming hall may use the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2.
176 is preferably not easily accessible.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work R
AM2303, display control circuit 2304, audio control circuit 2305, LED control circuit 2306
, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. Sub control circuit 2
300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko game machine, the sub control circuit 230
0 is also connected to a performance button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. Sub CPU
2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. In addition,
The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and presentation image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, and an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AM) that amplifies audio signals.
(referred to as P), etc.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC is sub-C
In response to a sound generation command supplied from the PU 2301, one sound data is selected from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is connected to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200 and the sub control circuit 230).
0, payout/emission control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko game machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 89 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in .

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process based on the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "time-saving hit," a "big hit," or a "loss." In addition, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be a "time saving win", a "big hit", or a "accessories opening win".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". ,
It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") compared to the case where the second special symbol hit determination process is performed.
In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes the first starting port 21
As the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of 20, the range of random numerical values for jackpot determination determined as "time saving hit", "jackpot" or "loss" (
width) and the corresponding determination value data ("time saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined. In addition, the second starting port 2140
As data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the
The range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as “time-saving hit”, “jackpot” or “accessory release hit” and the corresponding judgment value data (“time-saving hit judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value”) data" and "accessory object release per determination value data").

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. In other words, the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V prize opening 2155 (that is, the V
The expected value is controlled to a jackpot gaming state by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the activation frequency of the attacker 2152, the opening time, and the number of time saving continuations. It may be configured such that the value is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in .

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
9, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
For example, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 61 to 99.
In either case, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special symbol,
Regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. In other words, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2
201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
”.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
For example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. In other words, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 22
01 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.
Select.

Furthermore, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows, for example.
In other words, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CP
U2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "z" as the symbol designation command.
Select "A6".

Note that in the third pachinko game machine, although the explanation is omitted, the main RO of the main control circuit 2200
M2202 stores a special symbol stopping mode determining table corresponding to the special symbol stopping mode determining table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.
This is an example of a winning type determination table stored in . The hit type determination table determines the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the subsequent gaming state (more specifically, (time saving flag and time saving end conditions). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving game state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot game state.
"L" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display frequency of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. Note that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. Also, the selection symbol command is “z
2'', the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to L=50, M=5, N=1. do. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Also,
When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end condition as L=
50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CP
U2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object released", if the control is not made to the jackpot gaming state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot gaming state. Not only that, but also the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing control based on the opening of the accessory, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the opening of the accessory.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the jackpot gaming state aspect and the subsequent gaming state aspect as described above. Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, It is also possible to use different conditions. For example, all of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state may be different. Only one of the time-saving gaming states, the time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state, may be different. Also, only one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. , only one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C may be different. That is, the ending condition of at least one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" is changed to the ending condition of at least one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It may be made different depending on the game state.

[3-3-4. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. Main C
The PU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Decide on a pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 22
01 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 22
01, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is based on the value of the time saving flag, the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. decide. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular gaming mode, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly ever land in the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU2
201 is a variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140.
The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted at the time of the selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 generates a variation pattern of the second special symbol as an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. Main CPU22
The sub CPU 2301 receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from 01.
If the prefetch flag is set, perform a prefetch effect.

Although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is on or If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 2201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on.
Also, when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag is set (
) may be used so that a look-ahead effect is performed.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 92 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, although the explanation is omitted for the third pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine,
The main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 18). (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.) ), below:
The same processing as that performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). Main CPU
2201 executes the process of S2001 and then moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process.
Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demonstration display command when both the number of first special symbols on hold and the number of second special symbols on hold are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. Note that the third pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, so the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S2002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S200
2), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol has not been withheld (if NO in S2003), the main CP
U2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (if NO in S2004), the main CP
U2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005. Move.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 is YES), the main C
The PU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. The main CPU 2201 is S
After executing the process 2003, the special symbol control process is ended and the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (
It is preferable that steps S2001 to S2005) be performed within an interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the third pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S2005) is given a higher priority than the first special symbol.
) has been described, but the priority variation machine is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93), the main C
The special symbol management process executed by PU2201 will be explained. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is determined as YES), the special symbol management process is such that when S2003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S2004 is determined as YES.
In the case of S judgment, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
2002 is NO), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S
2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S2011 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S201
1), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2013.
Move to. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S201.
Move to 4.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S201.
Move to 5.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S
The process of 2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not “4”, the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2018.
Move to.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This S
The process of 2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5".
Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This S
The process of 2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6".
Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot termination processing. This S202
The process of 0 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 2201 will be explained. Figure 95 shows
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S20 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
In the case of the process called in step 13, the second special symbol becomes the process target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S20
21), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" in S2021 (
If S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a jackpot, or a role opening hit. After executing the process in S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. Main CPU2
201 executes the process of S2024, and then moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S2024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S202.
Move to 6.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol,
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination and/or the random value for production selection, etc. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. That will happen. The main CPU 2201 performs S202
After executing the process of 8, the process moves to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2.
Move to 031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to sub control circuit 2300.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 96, in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol variable display end process executed by the PU 2201 will be explained. Figure 96 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S20
41), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display termination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
If S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S2 in FIG. 94)
015) will be performed. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
sent to. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S20.
Move to 44.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
Return to

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol game determination process executed by the PU 2201 will be explained. Figure 97 shows the third
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game determination process targets the second special symbol
When called, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S20
51), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
If S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot game control start setting processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057),
Processes such as a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058) and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059) are performed. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), after the end of this special symbol game determination process,
The grand prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94).
).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if S2060 is NO), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, if it is determined that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (S2
060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening the accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the V winning device 2150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of openings is, for example, once. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), and processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2063).
2064), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2065), and a transmission reservation process for a start display command for opening of accessories (S2066). Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. That will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In addition, the main CPU 220
1, when the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. Figure 98 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is not performed in the first pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. ~Figure 3
There are some points that are different from the processing described with reference to 9. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine,
When the fixed change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value,
Although it has been explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on, the third pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high-precision game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. Also,
In the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), and then, on the condition that the variable probability flag is off, the process in step S192 is performed. However, the third pachinko game machine differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191 because it is not controlled to the high-precision gaming state as described above. Regarding other processes in the time saving management process, see Figure 3 for the first pachinko game machine.
This process is similar to the process described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 39. The main CPU 2201 performs S2071
After executing the process, the process moves to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 99, in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The V winning device opening preparation process executed by the PU 2201 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S20
81), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" in S2081 (
If S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 selects the opening pattern (
That is, as the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings are set. In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , for example, the first time is up to 60
It may be opened for 0 msec and then opened for a second time, for example, for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. Main CPU22
01 executes the process of S2083 and then moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084
), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. The main CPU 2201 performs S208
After executing the process of 4, the process moves to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S20
91), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
If S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines the maximum opening time (
That is, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S209.
Move to 4.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected.
In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (eg, per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91), so the player can understand that the jackpot game control process is executed. As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. Main C
After executing the process in S2096, the PU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. In other words, it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (S2095 is Y
The V winning game control executed by the ES determination will start from the second round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 performs a process (S209
9), V hit signal setting process to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), game state designation parameter setting process (S2100), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101),
2102), and a transmission reservation process (S2103) for the per-V start display command. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (S2 in FIG. 94) is performed.
018) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU22
After executing the process of S2104, 01 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 101 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S21
11), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
If S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit (S2113
is determined as YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114
), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (
S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to sub control circuit 2300. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 220
1 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit (S211
3), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2118.
Move to.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened.
This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been released, and a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97).
, Furthermore, if the V winning game control is started when a V winning is detected (YES in S2095 in FIG. 100), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. be done. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. In addition, in one round, the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150
This is not to exclude those that are opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121
), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) will be performed. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. Figure 102 shows
It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (S21
31), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (
If S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 operates the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
It is determined whether the number of game balls that have won 150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process,
A grand prize opening count switch 2132 (
(See FIG. 88) or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. Ru. In addition, the value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is the main R
It is stored in a predetermined area within AM2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (if S2132 is NO), the main C
The PU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 is YES),
The main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 operates the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
It is determined whether the maximum opening time of 150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (in the case of YES determination in S2133), the main CPU 22
01 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 activates the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2.
150 closure processing is performed. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (
By performing S2135), after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed again. Main CPU2201
After executing the process of S2135, the process moves to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (S21
41), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S21
41), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. Main CPU
2201 executes the process of S2142 and then moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. Main CPU22
01, after executing the process of S2143, ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is in the open state, the specific area is also in the open state, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short period of time and for a predetermined period after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short period of time). )except,
A specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole passes through a specific area, the first
This is more difficult than both the open mode and the second open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area where it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one of the multiple game balls that entered the jackpot
The number of opening modes of the specific area in which each game ball can easily pass through the specific area is not limited to two modes, but may be only one mode, or may be three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Also, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot,
As for the hit selection symbol command, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. In other words, the selected symbol command at the time of hit is "z0
”, the number of rounds is “3” and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command at the time of hit is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode.
It is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and 1
A 10R normal jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of 0%, and a 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way,
When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probabilities.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, the opening may be opened in response to the winning of a game ball into the grand prize opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot cannot pass through a specific area.
This is more difficult than the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

Furthermore, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is
The grand prize opening is open twice (both for short periods of time) during the short opening and after the long opening of the grand prize opening starts, but it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. If so, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one time or multiple times.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until the target is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the jackpot gaming state is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached.
After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Furthermore, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. It may also be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends.

[4-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number (for example, a special symbol hit determination Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time saving win/loss determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to execute time saving control using a random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

Furthermore, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit/loss determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU determines that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win".
Despite this, for example, it is preferable to derive a display mode that forcibly indicates "time saving loss".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is capable of displaying production images that make it impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving success" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a display production using characters, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2
If the number of times is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it may be displayed, and if the number of times is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it may not be displayed. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. time, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, etc.
It may be at any timing. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process are as follows:
Not limited to the above conditions, various conditions can be arbitrarily determined.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens passes through the V winning opening 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the V winning hole 2
If the passage of the game ball to 155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, the main CPU 2201 determines that if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", it is a "time-saving win".
It is preferable to determine whether or not to perform time saving control and the number of times of time saving control based on the following. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Also, for example, executing a time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state,
Conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, are determined in advance, and the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed when the predetermined conditions are met. Good too.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time-saving flag is turned on. When it is set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first
This corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to be "100" if the data is the judgment value data for saving time, and determining the number of times to save time to "50" if it is the second judgment value data for saving time.

Also, gaming states in which time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming states, time-saving gaming states, etc.)
However, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU calculates the number of time savings determined based on "time saving win".
Instead of the remaining number of time savings, a new number may be set (that is, the remaining number of time savings may be reset). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Also, gaming states in which time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming states, time-saving gaming states, etc.)
However, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU calculates the number of time savings determined based on "time saving win".
It may be added to the remaining number of time savings. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

Also, gaming states in which time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming states, time-saving gaming states, etc.)
If the result of this time-saving winning/losing judgment process is “time-saving winning”, the main CPU calculates the number of time-savings determined based on the “time-saving winning” from the time-saving remaining amount. This predetermined condition is satisfied by predetermining one of the following: a process of setting a new number in place of the number of times, and a process of adding the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" to the remaining number of time reductions. The number of time reductions may be set depending on the mode.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on,
When the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU determines whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "time saving win" are time saving controls with the same function. The process for setting the number of time saving times may be changed depending on the time saving control of different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process.
Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed,
It is preferable that the main CPU starts the time saving control based on the "time saving win" based on the closing of the opening/closing prize opening 2151.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of opening the opening/closing prize opening 2 is derived.
151 is opened, but when the V attacker 2152 opens it, passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CP
U2201 continues to execute the time saving control even after the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is closed.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When a time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving win",
The main CPU may rewrite the number of time saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time saving times (that is, execute time saving control until the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the second time saving probability is higher than the first time saving winning probability when the first time saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.
The time-saving winning probability when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be made higher, or the time-saving winning probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed is higher than the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning the time saving may be made high, or the probability of winning the time saving may be set to be the same or almost the same probability when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and when the second time saving winning/losing determination process is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play a game using game media, and based on the result of the game, receive rewards (for example,
The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which prize balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. That is,
In addition to the format in which a game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, The main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing game media owned by the player and enabling games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. In addition, the main control circuit is equipped to electromagnetically manage the gaming media owned by the player (
It may also be a game media management device that is connected to the computer and manages game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

Further, when managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine that has a ROM and RWM (or RAM),
It is connected to a two-way communication function via an external gaming media handling device (not shown) and a predetermined interface, and performs necessary operations for lending out gaming media (i.e., when a player inserts gaming media). action to provide game media) or win a winning role related to payout of game media (
The payout operation of game media (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the necessary game media when paying out the game media) or the game media used for the game when the winning combination is established. It suffices to use a device that can perform an electromagnetic recording operation. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media,
A possession game media number display device (not shown) is provided on the front of the pachinko gaming machine to display the number of game media held, and the number of game media displayed on this possession game media number display device is provided. It's okay. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area.
When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit,
The ball sending pestle pushes out the waiting game balls in the direction of the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, getting a ball means
In terms of data management, it means that a player obtains game media. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below as in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not.
Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine,
Converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to the number of balls you own (ball rental), counting the number of balls you own (
(return) requests are accepted. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored.
Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. In addition, a launch control circuit is provided separately from the main control circuit,
A frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel,
The main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol,
As mentioned above, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, but in this jackpot gaming state, neither the starting condition for the first special symbol nor the starting condition for the second special symbol is established, and the main C
The PU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol,
Based on the transition from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state Based on the transition (end of the small winning game), a process is performed to restart the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the starting conditions for the symbol is satisfied, and the main CPU
Neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol is newly performed. however,
While variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol are both performed, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU Regarding the special symbol, a variable display of the special symbol consisting of a group of LEDs is performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but as described above, the measurement of the variable time is interrupted.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other pachinko gaming machines such as pachislot, etc. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, a performance that involves a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop using the reel. Note that the symbol "stop" includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted either way. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., or touch.

In a pachinko game machine, the administrator of the game machine may set the performance etc. by operating the performance button, but there are cases where the machine is operated so that the player starts playing after setting the performance button. be. In this case, it is conceivable that the operation by the administrator will eventually become the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachislot, the administrator plays a 2-bet game,
In some cases, it is assumed that a player plays a 3-bet game while the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the 2-bet game may be played by the administrator of the gaming machine, so the game played by the administrator (for example, 2-bet games) A bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc. may be operations for a player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the main CPU controls the player's playing method by notifying whether the player is playing right-handed or left-handed. It may be possible to notify that it is unintended by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the main CPU controls the player's playing method, such as the player's push order (assist).
However, if the player's playing method is not the intended one,
The sub CPU may be controlled to notify the player that the game is unintended, such as an error or a warning.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on one board. In pachislot, there may be no payout control board, but payout may be controlled by a main control board, or may be separated into a main control board and a payout control board.

Additionally, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing that houses the equipment necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the casing, the outer frame and base door are regarded as the casing, and the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door, and tray unit is regarded as the casing. is possible. Note that there may be a unit, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc. in which various control boards are provided between the case and the door or between the frame and the door, and the door, frame, case, etc. In addition, various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, etc. may be present.

[5. First embodiment of fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, a fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fourth pachinko game machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine like the third pachinko game machine. It is a pachinko game machine. The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine differ from the third pachinko game machine in the basic specifications of playability, and accordingly, the various components arranged in the game area are different. The configuration is partially different.

Note that the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, do not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel; This is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. however,
The present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

First, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described, and then the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Hereinafter, when describing the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and the configuration and the second embodiment will be explained. A detailed explanation of the process will be omitted.

<First embodiment of fourth pachinko gaming machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 108, game board unit 3 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine
010 will be explained. Like the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 3010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 3100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 108, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a first passage gate 3126A,
The configuration and arrangement of the second passage gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the normal electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. . Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). ing. The first passage gate 3126A is equipped with a first passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A.

(Second passing gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is a normal electric accessory unit 314 which will be described later in the right side area 107.
5, and is arranged so that only game balls hit to the right can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is equipped with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery and a variable display of the normal symbols are performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, a prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be activated when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A, 3126B, and the state may be shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

This also applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko game machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko game machine described above.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 3120 is located in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A (that is, directly below the first passing gate 3126A), and is located approximately one distance from the first passing gate 3126A.
Individual game balls are placed close to each other with a distance between them. Furthermore, the first starting port 3120 is arranged in such a way that it is difficult for game balls to enter the game ball due to a game nail or the like, except for game balls that have passed through the first passage gate 3126A.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the first special symbol, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) are paid out. Become.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A is set to be the distance of approximately one game ball, but it may be the distance of approximately 1 to 2 game balls. Originally, the shorter the distance between the first starting port 3120 and the first passage gate 3126A, the better.
In order to make the functions of the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A independent, there must be a distance of at least one game ball between the first starting port 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A. is desirable.

In this way, by arranging the first starting port 3120 directly below and close to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately goes to the first starting port 31.
20, the start time of the variable display of the normal symbol triggered by the passing of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, and the timing of the start of the variable display of the game ball triggered by the arrival of the game ball to the first starting port 3120. Adjustment can be made with the start time of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

In addition, by arranging the first starting port 3120 in such a way that it is difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passage gate 3126A to enter, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, but the variable display of the special symbol. Variable display of special symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate 3120, and normal display triggered by the passage of a game ball into the first passage gate 3126A. It can be operated as a set with variable display of symbols.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 3140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can enter (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter).

When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of the second special symbol, or a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out. Become.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 includes a winning hole where a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory unit 3145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the object 3146, and is arranged in the right side area 107. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned winning a prize opening is set as the 2nd starting opening 3140, and the above-mentioned switch is set as the 2nd starting opening switch 3141.

The ordinary electric accessory 3146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 3148 (described later in FIG. 109) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 3147.
(see). The ordinary electric accessory 3146, that is, the shutter 3147 for ordinary electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general electricity shutter 3147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed in front of the entrance of the second starting port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 3140. It consists of When the general electricity shutter 3147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance equal to or longer than the diameter of the game ball to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140. The plate-shaped entering ball guiding portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and directs the received game ball to the first ball. 2 to the starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the general power shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part protrudes from the surface of the game panel 3100 by a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball and prevents the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140. The plate-shaped ball entering guiding part that prevents the ball from entering is buried in the surface of the game panel 3100 and allows the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107 to flow downward without receiving it. Note that instead of the general power shutter 3147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a large winning hole 3131, a large winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the large winning hole 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. It is an integrated unit. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged below in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 3131 is arranged in the right side area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to arrange a grand prize opening into which a game ball hit to the left can enter, or to arrange a grand prize opening into which a game ball can enter at the upper part of the center accessory 115. You may also do so.

The big winning hole 3131 is a winning hole that is opened so that up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. be. When a game ball enters this big prize opening 3131, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The big winning opening 3131 shifts from the closed state to the open state through the first route when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived, and the special symbol determination process. The V attacker 3152 is opened by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result is "accessory object opening hit", and the game ball that enters the opened V attacker 3152 enters the V prize opening in the V attacker 3152. This is the second route if you win.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 that operates the special electric shutter 3134 (see FIG. 109 described later). The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, has an open state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131, and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted.
When the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side and the big prize opening 3
131 opens, accepts the game balls flowing down into the right side area 107, and guides the received game balls to the big prize opening 3131. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the big winning hole 3131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 3131.

(V prize winning device)
The V prize winning device 3150 is provided on the downstream side of the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right side area 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 3151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter into the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 3151, and this V attacker 3152. Operate and open/close prize opening 31
A V attacker solenoid 3154 that opens and closes the opening/closing prize opening 51, a V attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151, and a V attacker solenoid 3154 that opens and closes the opening/closing prize opening 3151.
A V winning opening 3155 through which a game ball that has entered the winning device 3150 can pass, and a V winning opening 3
155, a V prize opening switch 3156 that detects that a game ball has passed through, and an opening/closing prize opening 31
A loss opening 3157 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning opening 3155 among the gaming balls that have entered the inside of the V winning opening 3150 from 51 can pass through, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 3155, and this V shutter. 3158 to open and close the V-shutter solenoid 3159. Note that the V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory unit 3145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The V attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and it moves the V attacker 3152 forward to create a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening/closing prize opening 3151. , is configured to be able to move the V attacker 3152 backward and enter the game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151 or to easily shift to the open state.

The opening/closing winning hole 3151 is a winning hole that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 when a "accessory object is released", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter per opening. It becomes. When a game ball enters this opening/closing prize opening 3151, the value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The V prize opening 3155 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4000
This is a winning opening that triggers a jackpot gaming state via the second route described above, on the condition that the game ball passes within 100 msec).

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155 is the first round, and the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 is set as the first round. Afterward (second round and onwards), a round game is executed in which the big prize opening 3131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V winning opening 315 is opened so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued.
5 (after the second round), a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is opened), the V
The number of attackers opened in the prize opening and in the jackpot game state may be one each. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the V prize opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133 is opened.
When the game ball enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 3157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 3155 enter (pass through). Lost mouth 3157
The game balls that have passed through are ejected outside the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the losing port 3157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 3155, the game ends without being controlled to a jackpot gaming state. becomes.

The V-shutter 3158 is a V-shutter solenoid 3159 (see Figure 109 below)
A closing mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155 due to the operation of the
It operates between an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the game according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a general electric solenoid 3148 and a special electric solenoid 3.
135, V attacker solenoid 3154, V shutter solenoid 3159, 1st
Starting port switch 3121, second starting port switch 3141, first passage gate switch 312
7A, the second passing gate switch 3127B, the big winning opening count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V winning opening switch 3156 are partially different in structure. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Furthermore, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine does not execute probability change control, the probability change notification display section 167 in the first pachinko game machine is not provided. Furthermore, as will be described later, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. Normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol reservation display section 165, second special symbol reservation display section 16
6 is not provided either.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 3147. When the normal power solenoid 3148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 3147 is moved forward to open the second starting port 3140, and the main CPU 201 is energized. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 3147 is moved backward and the second starting port 3140 is closed.

(Special electric solenoid)
The special electric solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates a special electric shutter 3134 consisting of an opening/closing door. When the special electric solenoid 3135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it causes the special electric shutter 3134 to fall forward and the big prize opening 3131 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize it (OFF). ) and
The special electric shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the big prize opening 3131.

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The V-attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-attacker 3152. When the V-attacker solenoid 3154 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it causes the V-attacker 3152 to move backward and close the opening/closing prize opening 3151.
is opened, and if the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the V attacker 3152 is advanced forward to close the opening/closing prize opening 3151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 3158. When the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the V-shutter 3158 is moved backward and the V-winning port 3155 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF) and
The V shutter 3158 is moved forward to close the V winning opening 3155. Also,
In this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is operated 200 msec after the opening/closing winning hole 3151 is opened, and the V-shuttering hole 3155 is opened. That is, V
The winning opening 3155 becomes open 200 msec after the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 3121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120. When the first starting port switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the first special symbol, and transfers the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the first special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the first special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of predetermined prize balls (for example, 3 game balls). .

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 3141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140. When the second starting port switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the second special symbol, and transfers the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the second special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). .

(1st passage gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first passage gate switch 3127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbol to the normal symbol hit determination process. Ordinarily, the variable display process of the symbols is performed.

(Second passage gate switch)
The second passage gate switch 3127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B. When the second passage gate switch 3127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbol to the normal symbol hit determination process. Ordinarily, the variable display process of the symbols is performed.

Note that when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A, and when the passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A is detected by the second passage gate switch 3127B, the passage of the game ball to the second passage gate 3 is detected by the second passage gate switch 3127B.
When the passage of the game ball to 126B is detected, the same normal symbol hit determination process is performed without distinction. Furthermore, even if the passing of the game ball to the passing gates 3126A, 3126B is detected by the first passing gate switch 3127A or the second passing gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing gate switches 3127A, 3127B" as appropriate),
Prize balls will not be paid out.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 3132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131. When the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process for game balls (gaming balls).

(V attacker count switch)
The V attacker count switch 3153 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151. When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the open/close winning slot 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls). The processing may be instructed to the payout/emission control circuit 400. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 3152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 3154 and the opening-closing prize opening 3151 is closed, even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing prize opening 3151 has not elapsed. will be done.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 3156 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155. A predetermined period of time (for example, 4000 m) after the V-attacker 3152 is released.
When the V winning a prize opening switch 3156 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning a prize opening 3155 within sec), the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155 is detected by the V winning hole switch 3156,
Prize balls will not be paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120. Note that the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed,
The main CPU 201 is capable of advancing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the first embodiment of this fourth pachinko gaming machine, probability change control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, probability change flag is set to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. may be executable.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, under certain conditions (
It counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in A time-saving gaming state), and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, a "limiter function" that partially restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state will transition after the end of the jackpot gaming state It is equipped with

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the game mode for left-handed hitting and right-handed hitting changes as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode.

[5-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 3120, such as "jackpot" and "accessory release hit".
Or the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "accessories release hit determination value data", "time-saving hit determination value") data”) is specified. In addition, "jackpot" or "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined for "Accessory object release hit" and the corresponding judgment value data ("Jackpot judgment value data", "Accessory object release hit judgment value data") is specified. has been done. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the main CPU 2
01 is based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and determines the result of the special symbol hit determination process as a "jackpot", "accessory release hit", or " Decided to save time. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 20
1, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as a "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol's random value for jackpot determination. do.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. Further, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, it may be configured such that "accessory object release hit" is not determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "time-saving win" be determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, other requirements can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "loss", then the first special symbol It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination made in the second special symbol hit determination process is more advantageous than the determination made in the hit determination process. Further, when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time saving hit" may be determined. That is, the fourth
In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "accessory object release hit" be determined when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. Other requirements can be changed as needed.

In addition, if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening a role object may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. It is better to make it . In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that, for example, the time-saving winning probability be a common probability for all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the winning rate of the V winning device 3150 can be changed by changing the opening time of the V attacker 3152 for each set value. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. That is, the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V prize opening 3155 (that is, the V
The expected value is controlled to a jackpot gaming state by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the activation frequency of the attacker 3152, the opening time, and the number of time saving continuations. It may be configured such that the value is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG.
Stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the embodiment

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and the second starting hole 3140 and the aforementioned judgment value data. This table is referred to when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command".

The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3. In this case, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 issues "z" as a selection symbol command.
3" and select "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if the hit determination value data for the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, and if the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201
selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is between 60 and 89, the main C
PU201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "z" as the symbol designation command.
Select "A2". Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selection symbol command is determined according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111. , "z6"<"z5"<"z4".

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected symbol ``z7'' is selected as the command, and ``zA3'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit judgment process,
Even if the second special symbol random number is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201
selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if the hit determination value data of the second special symbol is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CP
U201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
5".

Although the description is omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main control circuit 200
The main ROM 202 stores a special symbol stopping mode determining table corresponding to the special symbol stopping mode determining table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 have a display mode for time-saving hit, a display mode for jackpot, and a display mode for accessory release hit based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Alternatively, the display mode of a loss is derived. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112 is based on the main control circuit 2 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of 00. FIG. 112(a) is an example of the hit type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is not activated (limiter function is not activated), and FIG. 112(b) is an example of the hit type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is activated (limiter This is an example of a hit type determination table that is referred to when the function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 112, the winning type determination table includes, for the selected symbol command, the opening mode when the accessory is released, the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (the time saving flag and the number of time saving times). ), the opening mode per opening of the accessory, and the number of limiters at the time of the first hit are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and, based on the selected symbol command, determines the opening mode when the accessory is released, the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and time saving number), Determine the release mode and limiter number of times each accessory is released.

The "opening mode when the accessory is released" is the opening/closing prize opening 31 that is opened when the "accessory is released"
51 (opening mode of the V winning device 3150). The "first opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is opened for a short time (in this embodiment, for example, 200 msec), which is disadvantageous for the player. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this embodiment,
Since the V winning hole 3155 becomes open after 200 msec from the opening of the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the opening/closing winning hole 3151 opens in the first opening mode, and the game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 315.
1, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155, and from this point of view as well, this opening mode is disadvantageous for the player. Furthermore, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is open for a long time (for example, 18,000 msec), which is advantageous for the player. Then, when the opening/closing winning hole 3151 opens in the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning hole 3155, and from this point of view, the game is This is an advantageous opening mode for people.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 short, and the "second opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long, but the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long. The opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is made approximately the same in the "opening mode" and the "second opening mode", and the V shutter 3158 is easier to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" ( V prize opening 3
155 in an open state, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning hole 3155).

"Aspect of jackpot game state" indicates the opening mode of the jackpot opening 3131 that is opened at the time of "jackpot", and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds of jackpot. In addition to the number of jackpot rounds, the opening time per round and the jackpot openings to be opened may be determined.

"Subsequent gaming state mode" indicates the gaming state mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and means the setting of the "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times." In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "limiter number of times" indicates the limiter number of times set when there is a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, or C time-saving gaming state). The limiter number is subtracted each time the state shifts to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and when the limiter number = 0, the limiter function is activated and the winning type is determined as shown in FIG. 112(b). The table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z4 to z6" corresponding to "accessory object release hit", the main CPU 201 selects "accessory object release hit". determining a “first opening mode” that is disadvantageous for the player as a “winning opening mode”;
When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to "accessory object opening hit", the "second opening mode" which is advantageous for the player is set as the "opening mode per accessory object opening". ”.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the second special symbol hit determination process, either "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" is determined. Then, when a "accessory object opening hit" is determined as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball is placed in the opening/closing prize opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the prize opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, even if a "accessory object release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the "first release mode" that is disadvantageous for the player is determined, and the jackpot from the second route is It is difficult to shift to a gaming state. Therefore, the opening of the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated as substantially the same as a loss. In addition,
Although the opening of the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is handled in the same way as a loss, it will be referred to in switching the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "accessory object release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the "first Although the configuration is such that only the "opening mode" is determined, it may be configured such that a "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player is determined. When configured in this way, it is desirable that the setting is such that the "second opening mode" which is advantageous to the player is more difficult to select than the "first opening mode" which is disadvantageous to the player. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z1 to z3" corresponding to "jackpot", the main CPU 201 turns on the time saving flag. It is decided to set the time saving number to 100 times. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number of times to 5 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. . Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number of times to 3 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. . Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines to set the limiter number of times to 3 only in the case of a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state. .

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the number of rounds and the limiter number are set differently depending on the selected symbol command.
As a result, the profits given to players can be varied depending on the type of jackpot (symbol).
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), when the selected symbol command “z7” corresponding to “time saving hit” is the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 20
1 decides to set the time saving flag to ON and decides to set the number of time saving times to 1 time.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the first
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process, a time-saving gaming state with an extremely short period compared to a "jackpot" is determined.

The hit type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112(b) is as shown in FIG. 112(a).
Compared to the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated, the settings for "subsequent gaming state" and "limiter count" are different, and the "opening mode for opening the accessory" and "jackpot gaming state" are different. The settings for ``Aspect of `` are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is activated, the "limiter number of times" is naturally not set.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the jackpot game state is controlled. Therefore, the time saving flag and the number of time saving times are set as in FIG. 112(a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "big hit" or "accessory release hit", any selected symbol command However, as for the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time saving flag is set to OFF and the number of time saving times is not set. That is, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state shifts to the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
113 to 116 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 114 is a C time-saving game in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the state. Further, FIG. 115 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving gaming state and the B-time saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG.
It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 are based on the main RO of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in M202.

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for reach determination, the random value for effect selection, and the special symbol The variation pattern of the symbol is associated with the variable display time of the special symbol. The random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 113 to 116 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 according to the gaming state, and refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table.
The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of special symbol hit determination processing, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for performance selection.

Furthermore, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 3120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 3140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

The jackpot type reach and jackpot type normal reach shown in the "Remarks" column of Figures 113 to 116 indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). This is a reach production. The chance variation is a variation performance that indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG.
It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 3(2), and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3). In addition, the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal gaming state is not limited to three, but may be one,
It may be 2 or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113 (1) is created after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (that is, the initial value fluctuation pattern table), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 is set to ``per role opening''. After the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol hit determination process is performed after the limiter function is activated and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs. This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), which will be described later.

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” for “accessory object opening” is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z6” for “accessory object opening”. .

Variation pattern table T1 of special symbols in normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)
At T3, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol in the variation pattern "01H" (hereinafter "01H").
Either the variation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation B") where the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is selected. Ru.

The details will be described later using FIG. 137, but in the normal game state, chance variation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. The chance variation B, in which the starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening mode and is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is that the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. It tends to be in an open state.

Variation pattern table T1 of special symbols in normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)
In T3, the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. The chance variation B in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state is configured such that it is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table T1 < special symbol variation pattern table T2 < special symbol variation pattern table T3. has been done.

Therefore, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player, but as described above in FIG. As a selection symbol command,
Since the symbols are configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", the variation pattern table T3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

(Change pattern table of special symbols in C time-saving game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114(1) and FIG.
114(2) and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3). In addition, C
The number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is used for the first special symbol after the transition from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state, or in response to the selection symbol command “z4” for “accessory release hit”. This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the symbols are stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z5” for “accessory object opening”. .

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the selection symbol command “z6” for “accessory object release hit”. .

Variation pattern table C1 of special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3)
~ C3 also, the variation pattern table T1 of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113
~Similar to T3, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol "chance variation A", and the special symbol Any of the variation patterns with "chance variation B" in which the variable display time of the symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is selected.

Although the details will be described later using FIG. 138, even in the C time-saving game state, the chance variation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state and is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the second starting port 3140 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. tends to be an advantageous opening mode.

Variation pattern table C1 of special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3)
-C3, the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. In the time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode. Chance fluctuation B is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3. It is configured.

Therefore, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player, but as described above in FIG. As shown in the figure, the selection symbol command is configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is the most It is structured so that it is difficult to select.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113,
The special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG.
The variation patterns of the special symbols are common, but the variation patterns of the second special symbols are different when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "accessory opening hit". That is,
In the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The pattern has a variation time of, for example, 500,000 msec or 600 msec.
It has been decided that the performance will have an extremely long variation of 000msec. This means that in the normal gaming state, basically no game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 3140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous person even if the player wins a prize, but it is not always necessary to do this.

For this reason, the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG.
A common special symbol variation pattern table may be adopted for the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in A time-saving gaming state or B time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table selected when being controlled to the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state.

The special symbol variation pattern table A is configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short, except when the result of the hit determination process is a "jackpot". As a result, in the A time-saving gaming state or the B-time saving gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole 3155 in the opening/closing winning hole 3151.
It is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state via the second route by passing through in a short time.

(Special symbol variation pattern table after limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the second starting port 31 in the normal gaming state
The configuration is such that the chance variation B in which 40 is likely to be an advantageous opening mode is always selected.

When chance variation B is selected in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game state will easily shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball will enter the second starting port 3140. By entering the ball into the starting hole 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to a jackpot game state.

For this reason, even if the consecutive games in the time-saving gaming state end due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit judgment process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state becomes "time-saving winning", it will not be possible to play again. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 is configured such that chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". It may be configured such that chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

In addition, after the limiter function is activated and after the transition to the normal gaming state and after the first hit determination process of the first special symbol is completed, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) From this, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is selected.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 sets chance variation A to 20% and chance variation B to 20% when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit".
is configured so that it is selected with an 80% probability.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. It is not limited to the first time, but for example, in a case where a special symbol reservation function is provided, it may be a variable pattern table that is selected based on the hit determination processing of the special symbol up to the fourth time, or it may be selected based on the hit determination process of the special symbol up to the fourth time, or up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times. The variable pattern table may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the special symbol is determined based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. It is composed of a plurality of chance variation group A, in which the variable display time of the symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, and a plurality of chance variation B groups, in which the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols. Good too.

[5-3-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 117 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a ``normal symbol hit'' or ``loss'' by lottery based on the above.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the normal symbol hit determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”).
are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117 and determines normal symbol hit determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for winning determination is between 0 and 89, and stores the winning/losing determination value data. It is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 89, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 89, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to “normal "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, among the normal game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A time-saving game state (Fig. 117
The selectivity shown in (approximate) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the normal gaming state, the B time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[5-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the embodiment.

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data and the passing gates 3126A, 312.
This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" which determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 6B. be. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

In the normal symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 118, the normal symbol hit judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits are associated. It is stipulated that In addition, the symbol random number of the normal symbol is, for example, 0 to 9.
Extracted from 9 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 and determines a selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29. Select "fz1" as normal symbol random number 30-6
9, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select "fz3" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99. select.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits", the win/loss judgment value data (normal symbol hit judgment processing (result) and the symbol random value of the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 117) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. Thereafter, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[5-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table determines the normal electric role as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits which is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Reference is made when determining the opening pattern of object 3146.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 119, the game state, the normal symbol win selection symbol command, and the opening pattern as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG.
The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. After that, the main CPU 201 executes the determined normal electric accessory 3146.
An opening pattern command for the normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of is transmitted to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 regardless of which normal symbol winning selection symbol command is the normal symbol winning selection command. For the opening pattern, the first opening time is 200 msec,
It is decided that there will be no wait time and no second release.

In addition, in the case of the normal game state, the first opening time may be varied depending on the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. For example, in the normal game state, if the selection symbol command for normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 200 msec for the first opening time, and the normal symbol hit pattern command is "fz1". When the selection symbol command is “f
z2'', the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set to 250 msec for the first opening time, and when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is ``fz3'', the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is set to 250 msec. The opening pattern, which is an aspect, may have a first opening time of 300 msec, and the second opening time may be set to 0 for any normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2000 msec. , a wait time of 200 msec, and a second release time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, for the first opening time of 2500 msec. , weight time 20
0 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec. In addition, the main CPU20
1, when in the A time saving game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is set for the first opening time 300
0 msec, wait time 200 msec, and second release time 3000 msec.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. It is determined that the first opening time is 2500 msec, there is no wait time, and there is no second opening. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, the selection symbol command (for example, "fz
1''), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous mode is the disadvantageous mode. In addition, the degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball to the second starting opening 3140 when the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is released.

If the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the most advantageous among the opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. The degree becomes an advantageous aspect.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is " Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the case of "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
The random number value for normal symbol performance selection extracted when the game ball passes through A and 3126B, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated. Note that the random number value for normal symbol performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and changes the normal symbol variation based on the gaming state and the random value for normal symbol production selection extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. The pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol are determined. When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols to the sub CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10,000, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol production selection from 0 to 99.
It is determined to be msec.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. If either of the above is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 800 mse.
c.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000ms.
ec is determined and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each gaming state. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, among the various game states, the normal electric accessory 314
6 takes the shortest time to release.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols is fixed to 10000 msec in the normal game state and the C time saving game state. For this reason, FIGS. 113 to 1
In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in 15, as mentioned above, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", chance variation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is The variable display time is 13,000 msec, which is longer than 10,000 msec, and chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, has a variable display time of 9,000 msec, which is shorter than 10,000 msec. For details, see Figures 137 and 138.
As will be described later using , the normal electric accessory 3146 opening pattern (second The opening mode of the starting port 3140) will change.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by 1 are the main control main process (Figures 20 to 23).
Although the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and switch input detection processing performed in S39 in (see) are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and switch input detection processing will be explained, and the main CPU
A description of other processes executed by 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine include the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine (for example,
Jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42, 133), etc.) will be explained below using different step numbers, including the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 executes the process of S3001, and then moves the process to S3002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S3001, an address setting process is performed in which the address of the special symbol work area, etc. in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S3002 is N
If the determination is O), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S300
2), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display (S3003
(if the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol does not start variable display (S3004
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is to start variable display (S3
004), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display (S300
3), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122. The main CPU 201 is S3
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is finished, and the process is transferred to the main control main process (Figure 2
0 to (see Figure 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable that steps 3001 to S3005) be performed within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described. FIG. 122 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is determined as YES), the special symbol management process is such that when S3003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S3004 is determined as YES.
In the case of S judgment, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
3002 is NO), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

In addition, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG.
This is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S3
011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S3011 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S301
1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process in S3012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S3013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S3013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3014.
Move to.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S3014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 returns the process to S3015.
Move to.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S3
The process of 015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This S
The process 3016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This S
The process 3017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4".
Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This S3
The process of 018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This S3
The process of 019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This S3020
This process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

After completing the processing of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 123
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S30 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol
In the case of the process called in step 13, the second special symbol becomes the process target.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S30
21), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
If S3021 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referred to and the special symbol jackpot determination random value stored in the special symbol determination area is used to determine the special symbol hit. be exposed. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a role-opening hit, or a time-saving hit. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a hit when an accessory is released. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S3022, the process moves to S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is
This is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, and time saving win). In this process,
With reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111), the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "design designation command" are determined using the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area. After executing the process in S3023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112), the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 that was opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and accessory openings, but there may be only one type of jackpot and/or accessory opening. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of types of time saving. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S3024, the process moves to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process,
Determine the variation pattern table of any of the special symbols shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 according to the gaming state, refer to the determined variation pattern table of the special symbol, and determine the type of special symbol and the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Then, a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After executing the process in S3025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 113 to 116) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025). After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process in S3026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols starts, the ceiling counter update process that adds 1 to the ceiling counter and the time saving number counter A time saving counter update process of subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to the specified number of times, and the time saving identification identifies the B time saving gaming state. Set the number = 2 and control the transition to the B time saving gaming state. Further, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled.

In addition, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a 1-type and 2-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time-saving management performed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine The processing also differs from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first embodiment of the pachinko game machine No. 4, the game is not controlled to a high-precision game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. The process of S192 is performed, but in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the process is different in that the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191 because the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state as described above. . In the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38), the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled by the ceiling flag that is turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (see S208) without performing the process of S202. will be held. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S3027, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3027.
Move to 3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (
(See S3014 in FIG. 122) will be performed. The main CPU 201 performs S3028
After executing the process, the process moves to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the remaining number of time savings, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S3029 and then moves the process to S3030.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S3030, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S3030) and the special symbol performance start command transmission reservation process (S3031)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[5-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, S302 in the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123)
5, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be explained. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the limiter activation flag is on (S
3025-1). In S3025-1, if the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter activation flag is on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2, and if it determines that the limiter activation flag is not on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter activation flag" is a flag that counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and is activated when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number. , is turned on in the limiter number update process (see FIG. 127), which will be described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=0. In S3025-2, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-3, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-5. Move.

Unlike the first pachinko machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (adds 1) when the variable display of special symbols starts, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, B
This is a counter for controlling the time saving gaming state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is performed, the ceiling counter is not added yet in the "time saving management process" of S3027, so the ceiling counter = 0. The case means the time when the first variable display of the special symbol starts in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag,
The process moves to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) as a specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. In addition, as shown in the modification, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) may be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small winning symbol switching information to be described later is set to 0, and from the next time onwards, from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG.
Preparations are made so that the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in (1) is selected.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state,
In order to understand which of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state is being controlled, information on the gaming state (time saving identification number) is acquired.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 displays information on the symbol that was previously displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 when it was determined that the first special symbol was a "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process. (hereinafter referred to as "small hit symbol switching information").

"Small winning symbol switching information" is the overwriting process of the small winning symbol switching information (S in Figure 126), which will be described later.
3062), one piece of information is overwritten and updated. When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a "accessory release hit", the selection symbol command "
When the first special symbol corresponding to "z4" is stopped and displayed, small hit symbol switching information = 0 is stored,
When the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, the small hit symbol switching information = 1 is stored, and when the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is stopped and displayed. , small hit symbol switching information=2 will be stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one fluctuation pattern table from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the acquired gaming state information and small winning symbol switching information.

Specifically, when the main CPU 201 determines that the control is in the normal gaming state, if the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0,
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. , when the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z6”=2, a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3) is determined.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state,
When the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is determined, and the small winning symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command “z5” is determined. When the switching information = 1, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is determined, and when the small hit symbol switching information according to the selection symbol command "z6" is 2,
A special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is determined.

In addition, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the A time saving gaming state or the B time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 without depending on the small hit symbol switching information. do.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of special symbol and win/loss information (big hit, accessory release hit, and time-saving hit) as a result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 acquires the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 executes the above S3025-4 or the above S
Referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in step 3025-7, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special symbol type, win/loss information, reach determination random value, and performance selection random value. .

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 125
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

If it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S30
41), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
If S3041 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S3 in FIG. 122)
015) will be performed. After executing the process in S3042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S3043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter.
As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 126 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly,
S3015 during special symbol management processing in which the special symbol game determination processing targets the second special symbol
When called, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S30
51), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
If S3051 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S3052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if S3052 is NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S3061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S3052), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time-saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of times updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the first route to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as will be described later, when transitioning from the second route to the jackpot game state, the V winning device opening control process (FIG. 130
(see S3096), the limiter count is updated (see S3096). Further, details of the limiter number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. Main CPU201
After executing the process of S3053, the process moves to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game control start setting processing.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG.
A signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the player (reference) is generated and updated. In addition,
The signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol winning signal that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S3054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3055.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S3054, the main CPU 201
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as the time saving flag and time saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the jackpot opening 3131 (S3056), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S
3057), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), gaming state designation parameter setting processing (S3059), and transmission reservation processing for jackpot start display command (S3060). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. That will happen. After that, main C
The PU201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S3061, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a hit in the opening of the accessory, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a time-saving hit or a loss (if the determination is NO in S3061), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the special symbol has been released (YES in S3061), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S3062. Move.

In S3062, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected symbol command when it is determined that the first special symbol is a "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination process, and when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects a small hit symbol. The switching information is overwritten with "0" and updated, and when the selected symbol command is "z5", the small hit symbol switching information is overwritten and updated with "1", and when the selected symbol command is "z6", the small winning symbol is Overwrite the switching information with "2" and update. Note that when it is determined as a "accessory opening hit" as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the process moves to S3063 without overwriting the small hit symbol switching information. After executing the process in S3062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory opening. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per accessory item opening, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S3063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 3150. In this embodiment, the V winning device 3150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of openings is, for example, once. After executing the process in S3064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set a signal for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), and processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S30
66), a game state designation parameter setting process (S3067), and a transmission reservation process for a start display command for opening of accessories (S3068). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed. That will happen. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S3069 that it is not time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that it is time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) based on the selection symbol command "z7" for time saving per, and executes the determined game. Sets state aspect data. Specifically, the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to 1, and the time saving identification number for identifying the C time saving gaming state is set to 3. In addition,
The time saving identification number is set to 1 when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, and B
When the time saving game state is entered, the time saving identification number=2 is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hit type determination table is divided into two types depending on whether or not the limiter function is activated.
However, regarding time-saving hits, the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated is referred to, regardless of whether the limiter function is activated or not. Main CPU
201 executes the process of S3070, and then moves the process to S3071.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-
1). In S3053-1, if it is determined that the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-2, and if it is determined that it is not in the A-time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-5. Move.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count and updates it. After executing the process in S3053-2, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3053-
Move to 3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the limiter count=0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter number of times is 0, it moves the process to S3053-4, and if it is determined that the limiter number of times is not 0, it ends the limiter number of times updating process and executes the process in a special manner. The process returns to the symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, if it is determined that the limiter number of times = 0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state has reached the limiter number of times.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter activation flag.
After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the limiter number of times at the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated as shown in FIG. 112(a), determines the limiter number based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined limiter number. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. Figure 128
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S30
72). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S3072,
The process moves to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Also, various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area are cleared. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S3074).
The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S30
81), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
If S3081 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, and determines the opening mode for each accessory opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 3150,
Set the determined opening mode (for example, maximum opening time and maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is disadvantageous for the player, the maximum time limit is 200 msec.
``Second opening mode'' which is advantageous for the player by setting the opening pattern to be opened only once.
When this is the case, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec. Note that the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous for the player, the opening may be performed twice for a maximum of 900 msec each time, or the first opening may be performed, for example. Open for a maximum of 600msec, and open the second time for a maximum of 1200msec.
It may be left open. Furthermore, the total specified time (
For example, a plurality of opening patterns may be provided within a range not exceeding 1800 msec), and one of these opening patterns may be set based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, for example.

In addition, in S3082, the main CPU 201 controls the V
The operating mode of the shutter 3158 is determined, and the determined operating mode (for example, maximum opening time, maximum number of openings, etc.) is set. In this embodiment, from the time when the V winning device 3150 is opened, two
Set the operating mode to open the V winning port 3155 after 00 msec. Main C
After executing the process in S3082, the PU 201 moves the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 3155 is performed. Main CPU201
After executing the process of S3083, the process moves to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084)
By doing this, after the V-winning device opening preparation process is completed, the V-winning device opening control process (
(See S3017 in FIG. 122) will be performed. The main CPU 201 performs S3084
After executing the process, the process moves to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S30
91), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
If S3091 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 when the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3092), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3092.
Move to 3093.

On the other hand, in S3092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S3092), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (ie, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S3093), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (YES in S3093), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S3094.
Move to.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 3150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 3151). After executing the process in S3094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 3155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 3156). In addition, the above specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 3150. For example, the above specified time may be within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 3152 starts. can do.

If it is determined in S3095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3096.

In S3096, the main CPU 201, as in S3053 above, subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state.
After executing the process in S3096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the V winning game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG.
A signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) is generated and updated. In addition,
The signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol winning signal that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 112), so the player cannot perform the jackpot game control process. As in the case where the game is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S3097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S3097, the main CPU 201
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as the time saving flag and time saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 3152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. In other words, it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (S3095 is YE).
The V winning game control that is executed due to the S determination will be started from the second round game. After executing the process in S3098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened (
Namely. Processing to set the upper limit of the number of operations of the V attacker 3152 (S3100)
, processing to set the V hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), processing to set the gaming state specification parameter (S310)
3), and transmission reservation processing of the per-V start display command (S3104).
In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the big winning opening preparation process (S301 in FIG. 122) is performed.
8) will be carried out. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined in S3095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. Main CPU20
1 ends the V winning device opening control process after executing the process of S3105, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 131 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening preparation process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S31
11), the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
If S3111 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the counted value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main R
It is stored in a predetermined area within AM203. After executing the process in S3112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (S3113
is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114)
By doing this, the jackpot end processing (see S3020 in FIG. 122) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation processing is completed. After executing the process in S3114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S3
116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit (S311
3), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S3117, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of the big winning hole to be opened. In this process, the big winning hole 3131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened to a jackpot gaming state.
In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot and the jackpot game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot 3131 is set as the jackpot to be opened. selected, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of opening the accessory,
In the case where the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived and the V winning game control is started by detecting the V winning, the big winning opening to be opened is not the big winning opening 3131,
The V winning device 3150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 3151) may be selected. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S3118, and then moves the process to S3119.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 3131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major winning hole 3131, the number of prize balls when winning to the grand prize opening 3131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 3131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases in which the big prize opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case,
It is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the big prize opening 3131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S3119,
The process moves to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 3131 or the V prize winning device 3150 is performed. After executing the process in S3120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121)
By doing this, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (Figure 1
22 S3019) will be performed. After executing the process in S3121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S3123,
The grand prize opening preparation process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. Figure 132 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (S31
31), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (
If S3131 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning hole counter counted by the big winning hole count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 3131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3132), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S3.
Move to 133.

On the other hand, in S3132, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 3131 is the maximum winning number (YES in S3132), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (S311 in FIG. 131)
It is determined whether the maximum opening time set in 9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 3131 has not elapsed (NO in S3133), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 3131 has elapsed (YES in S3133), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 3131. After executing the process in S3134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S
3135), after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) will be performed again. After executing the process in S3135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (S31
41), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S31
41), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags are set and the values of various counters (for example, a ceiling counter, a round counter, a big winning slot prize counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process in S3142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the jackpot ends. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to whether the limiter activation flag is on or off, and if the limiter activation flag is off, determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. If the activation flag is on, a hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b) is determined. Then, referring to the determined winning type determination table, the mode of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) is determined, and data of the determined gaming state mode is set. Specifically, when the limiter activation flag is off, the time saving flag is set to 1 (time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to 100, and the A time saving game state is identified. The time saving identification number = 1 is also set. Also, if the limiter activation flag is on, set the time saving flag = 0 (turn off the time saving flag)
At the same time, the time saving number counter = 0 and the time saving identification number = 0 are set. Main CPU2
01, after executing the process of S3143, ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. In addition, Fig. 134
It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 134 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. Main C
The PU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 134 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S3
291).

If it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (S3291 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S329
1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process in S3292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3293. Note that the main CPU 201 controls S based on the control state number read in the process of S3292.
Processing after 3293 is performed.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S3293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3294.

In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", and ``Symbol variation pattern determination processing'' and ``normal pattern time saving management processing'' are performed, and then a process for setting the control state number of the normal pattern to ``1'' is performed. In addition, if the random number value etc. for hit determination of the normal symbol is not extracted (when various random number values are not stored in the normal symbol determination area), the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination process, etc., and it waits for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 20
1 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. (win or loss).

In the normal symbol determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201
With reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, based on the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data (results of the normal symbol hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol determination area, " Decide on the “Normal symbol hit select symbol command”.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined normal symbol, and causes the normal symbol display section 161 to start variable display of the normal symbol.

In the regular pattern time saving management process in the normal pattern variable display start process, the time saving number counter is 1.
It is determined whether the number of time reductions is greater than or equal to 1, and if the time reduction number counter is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number counter. As a result of the subtraction, if the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition control from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed. In addition, if the time saving number counter is not 1 or more, the current regular time saving management process is ended, and even if the time saving number counter is 1 or more, the result of subtraction from the time saving number counter is 0. If not, the current time-saving management process for ordinary figures is ended without clearing the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C, the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 when the variable display of the normal symbol starts.
However, when the variable display of the normal symbol starts, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter only when in the C time saving gaming state, and in the A time saving gaming state and B the time saving gaming state. In this case, it may be configured such that 1 is not subtracted from the time saving counter at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display end process for normal symbols. This process of S3294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is changed to " 2”. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S3
The process 295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 3296.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the regular symbol (for example, a hit or loss of the regular symbol). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to " 3”. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 in the normal symbol game determination process, the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is determined, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 executes the determined normal electric accessory 3.
The sub CPU 30 sends the opening pattern command of the normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of 146.
Send to 1.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This S3
The process of 296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 3297.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This S3
The process of 297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol per end processing, the main CPU 201 performs the above steps S3293 to S32.
Processing is performed to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in step 96 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

As mentioned above, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed in the gaming state when setting the variable display time of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is opened) in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S3293. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is determined based on the above S
In the normal symbol game determination process of 3295, it is determined based on the gaming state when the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (when the variable display of the normal symbols ends). Therefore, if the gaming state is changed while the variable display of normal symbols is being performed, the normal symbol will be A hit determination and an opening pattern for the normal electric accessory 146 are determined.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that it is equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until a start condition is met. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection processing and the ball passing detection processing are partially different. In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a large winning opening count switch 3132, a V attacker count switch 3153, a V winning opening switch 315, and
6 has been added, so some of these processes have been added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes the first starting opening winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process in S3381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3382.

In this first starting port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the first starting port switch 3.
121 detects that the game ball enters the first starting port 3120, the first starting port 3120
The payout information corresponding to the above is set, and it is determined whether or not there is a free area in one first special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one first special symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a first special Various random values such as the random value of the symbol, the random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random value for production selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the various extracted random values are combined into one first Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one first special symbol determination area, the first starting opening winning detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes the second starting opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process in S3382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3383.

In this second starting port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 controls the second starting port switch 3.
141 detects that a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the second starting port 3140
The payout information corresponding to the above is set, and it is determined whether or not there is a free area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one second special symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a second special symbol start information, Various random numbers such as the random number of the symbol, the random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, the random number for production selection of the second special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the various extracted random numbers are combined into one second Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one second special symbol determination area, the second starting opening winning detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, only one first special symbol determination area and one second special symbol determination area are provided. First, it does not include a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area (4) for holding special symbol starting information until a starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S3383). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S3383, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S338.
Move to 4.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S3384). In the big winning hole passage detection process, when the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects that the game ball enters the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information according to the big winning hole 3131, and A grand prize opening counter for counting the winning number of game balls into the grand prize opening 3131 is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S3384, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V attacker passage detection processing (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, the main CPU 201 activates the big winning opening count switch 3132.
When the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131 is detected, the payout information corresponding to the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning hole 3151) is set, and the payout information to the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning hole 3151) is set. A V-attacker winning counter for counting the winning number of game balls is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S3385, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S33.
Move to 86.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening passage detection processing (S3386). In the V winning opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 detects the V winning opening 3 by using the V winning opening switch 3156.
When the passage of the game ball to 155 is detected, the V winning a prize opening passage flag is turned on. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155, the payout information is not set. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S3386, the process moves to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area is detected. Determine whether there is free space. Main CPU2
01, when it is determined that there is a free space in one normal symbol determination area, various random values (for example, random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol number for normal symbol, and normal symbol start information) Various random numbers (such as random numbers for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various random numbers are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passage detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the normal symbol, only one normal symbol determination area is provided, and the normal symbol is used to hold the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied. It does not have a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4).

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the regular game mode in the A time-saving game state and the B-time saving game state. Also,
In the C time-saving game state, the game mode for left-handed hitting and right-handed hitting changes as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, and in the A time saving gaming state and B time saving gaming state, the second starting port 3120
At step 140, the game state is shifted in response to the game ball entering the game ball. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the gaming state is shifted when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 or a gaming ball enters the second starting port 3140. . In the following, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the first starting port 3120 in the normal gaming state, and that the game ball has entered the second starting port 3140 in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state. An explanation will be given as a premise.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120, it is determined to be a "big hit,""accessory release hit," or "time saving win" (see FIG. 110)
.

In the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "accessory object release hit" is determined, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155, the state shifts to the jackpot game state,
When the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 3155, the game state is not shifted and the normal game state is maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and it is determined that a "accessory object has been released", the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening/closing winning port 3151) is not suitable for the player. Since the opening mode is disadvantageous, it is extremely difficult to shift to a jackpot gaming state. For this reason, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "accessory object release hit" is determined, the normal game state is maintained without substantially changing the game state. .

After shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the A time-saving gaming state.

In the A time saving game state, the end condition of the A time saving game state is ``100 time saving times completed (Figure 1
12)" and "transition to jackpot gaming state" are set to be satisfied.

Here, "100 time saving times completed" means "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of special symbols and the variable display of normal symbols is counted 100 times".

In addition, in this embodiment, "the number of time saving times 100 times" is defined as "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times"; The variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times."
It may also be possible to simply specify ``to be carried out twice''.

Then, when the time-saving gaming state A shifts to the jackpot gaming state (consecutive winnings during the time-saving gaming state A), the limiter number is counted, and if the limiter number has been reached, the state shifts to the normal gaming state,
If the limiter number of times has not been reached, the game returns to the A time saving game state.

Further, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "time-saving hit" is determined, the state shifts to the C-time-saving game state.

In the C time saving game state, the end condition for the C time saving game state is "1 time saving number completed (Fig. 112)".
(see)" and "transition to jackpot gaming state" are set to be satisfied.

Here, "time saving count ends once" means "variable display of special symbol is counted once" and "
This means that one of the following conditions is satisfied: "The variable display of the normal symbol is counted once." In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of time saving times" is counted when a special symbol or a normal symbol is variablely displayed, and if the state has not been shifted to the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed or when the first variable display of normal symbols is performed, the C time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state.

Further, after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state C to the jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the time-saving gaming state A after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Further, in the normal game state, when the number of variable display times of special symbols (for example, ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), the normal game state shifts to the B time-saving game state.

The B time saving game state is set as a condition for ending the B time saving game state.
It is set that either one of the following conditions is satisfied: "End of the variable display of special symbols in the previous round" and "Transition to the jackpot game state."

In the B time-saving game state, when "the end of the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times" is established, B
Transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Further, after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state B to the jackpot gaming state, the game will shift to the time-saving gaming state A after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the time-saving gaming state, there are three time-saving gaming states: A working-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, but without the B working-time saving gaming state,
It may be configured to include two time-saving gaming states: A time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state.

[5-6. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". By adjusting, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric accessory 3146 can be made different. An example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 will be described below.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of the opening state of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an example of the opening state of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

137 and 138 show the fluctuation and stoppage of the normal symbol display section 161, the fluctuation and stoppage of the first special symbol display section 163, and the normal electric solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric accessory 3146.
The operation and stop of the game, and the transition of the game state are shown in the upper and lower diagrams.

Further, FIGS. 137 and 138 are based on the assumption that the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol win" and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time saving win". In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state is 1000, as shown in the variation pattern table of the normal symbols in FIG. 120.
It is fixed at 0msec (10s).

In addition, in FIGS. 137 and 138, as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG.
) is shown as "short opening", and the advantageous opening state in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric accessory 3146 is long in C time-saving game state is shown as "long opening". . Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed in response to the "time saving win" is shown as "stop with C time saving symbol".

FIG. 137(a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 113, and determines that the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game starts after the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (after the variation of the normal symbols ends). The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG. As a mode of opening the accessory 3146, "short opening" is performed in the normal game state.

FIG. 137(b) shows that in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 113, and determines that the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed.

Here, FIG. 137(b) shows the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit in the C time saving game state,
One operation (one opening) of the general power solenoid 3148 is illustrated. In addition, when "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command in the C time-saving game state, the normal power solenoid 3148 is activated twice with a wait time in between. This also applies to FIG. 138(b), which will be described later.

FIG. 138(a) shows that in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state C in FIG. This is an example of a time chart when a long "chance fluctuation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (the number of time savings ends once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (after the variation of the normal symbols ends), the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction. Shifting to gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG. As an opening mode of the accessory 3146, "short opening" is performed in the normal game state.

FIG. 138(b) shows that in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state C in FIG. This is an example of a time chart when a short "chance fluctuation B" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), when the special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (the number of time savings ends once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the variation of the normal symbols ends). Shifting to gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``one time-saving number completed'', is defined as ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once''. In addition to ``, the condition is that ``the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once''. For this reason, Figure 13
As shown in FIG. 7(a) and FIG. 138(a), when the state shifts to the C time-saving game state after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game ball is hit right as an unintended game and the game ball is sent to the second passing gate. 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and an unintended "long release" is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146. can be prevented.

In this way, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol hit determination process is determined based on the gaming state when the normal symbol is variablely displayed (when the normal symbol starts changing). The opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is when the variable display of the normal symbol ends (
Since the decision will be made based on the gaming state at the end of the variation of the normal symbols, there will be new interest in the gaming state being changed or maintained while the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed. This can further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", The game state can be changed and maintained while the normal symbols are intentionally displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is variable for the normal symbol. A variation pattern table for a plurality of special symbols with different selection rates, ``Chance Variation A'' which is longer than the display time, and ``Chance Variation B'', where the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is provided. Since the special symbol variation pattern table is switched according to the changing conditions, the switching of the special symbol variation pattern table can also be interesting, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the predetermined change condition is based on the information of the symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 (small hit symbol switching information) when it is determined that it is a "accessory release hit". Since the special symbol fluctuation pattern table can be switched, it is possible to make the player more interested in the "accessory opening hit" and the small winning symbol switching information, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the second starting port 31
If the game ball enters the first starting port 3120, it is easier to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. In particular, in this embodiment,
It is configured so that when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it can substantially shift to a jackpot game state. For this reason, as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146, the value of the "long opening" that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is made more interesting. , it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a limiter function is provided, but even if the consecutive winnings in the A time-saving gaming state are ended due to the activation of the limiter function and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the normal gaming state after the activation of the limiter function In the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is selected. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which the advantageous chance variation B in which "long release" is likely to be performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is likely to be selected in the normal game state. For this reason, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", it is possible to transition to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again. , it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``end of the number of time-savings once'', is ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once'', and the variable display of the special symbol is Since it is configured so that the game state can be changed by subtracting the number of time-savings when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be "time-saving hit" is increased. Also, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the time-saving gaming state is always controlled, and it is possible to maintain the gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time saving game state is "time saving number of times 1".
In addition to "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once", "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once" is also a condition for "end of round", so in the C time-saving gaming state, the intention Even if you hit right as a game that does not allow you to play and let the game ball pass through the second passage gate 3126B, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal electric accessory is It is possible to prevent unintended "long opening" from being performed as the opening mode of 3146.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 3126B
is located below the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right area 107,
C In the time-saving game state, even if the game ball happens to flow down the right side area 107 and pass through the second passage gate 3126B, the game ball is prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric accessory 3146. can do.

Moreover, in this embodiment, by arranging the first starting port 3120 directly below and close to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. When the game ball passes through the first passage gate 3126A, the normal symbols start to fluctuate, and the special symbols start to fluctuate when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. Adjustment can be made with the timing (variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

<Second embodiment of fourth pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passing gates) and the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols are provided for a predetermined number of times. They differ in that they are equipped with a hold function that holds them until the end of the game, and in the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state.

Hereinafter, in describing the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers will be used for the same components as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. A detailed explanation of its configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 139, game board unit 4 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine
010 will be explained. Similarly to the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine, this game board unit 4010 is also arranged so that the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) is located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2). (see).

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 4100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the gaming board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
The main difference is that the second passage gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not provided in the right side area 107.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 31 is located in the right area 107.
26B is not equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. This is to prevent the number of reserved symbols from being stored and the variable display times of normal symbols and special symbols becoming unable to be adjusted.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, the LED unit 160 is equipped with a normal symbol reservation display section 162, a first special symbol reservation display section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166. But there are differences.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
Regarding the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, compared to the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (FIG. 109), the control circuit of the second embodiment of the game ball to the second passage gate 3126B is The configuration of the second passage gate switch 3127B that detects passage is deleted, and the normal symbol reservation display section 162, the first special symbol reservation display section 165, and the second special symbol reservation display section 166 in the first pachinko game machine are removed. Since only the above configuration has been added, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since the main RAM 203 has a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the main RAM 203 stores the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. A normal symbol starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4) for storing up to a predetermined number of special symbol starting information, and a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area for storing starting information of special symbols up to a predetermined number Special symbol starting storage area (4), and second special symbol starting storage area (1) to second
It has a special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the special symbol is mainly changed in order to synchronize the variation time between the special symbol and the normal symbol. The variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for normal symbols, etc. are different.

Further, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, "
It is set when either of the following conditions is met: ``100 time saving times completed'' or ``transition to jackpot gaming state'', but ``100 time saving times completed'' does not count the variable display of normal symbols. It is set that "the variable display of the special symbol shall be performed 100 times". Similarly, as the end condition for the C time-saving gaming state, it is set that either of the conditions "end of the number of time-saving games 1" and "transition to the jackpot gaming state" is satisfied, but "the number of time-saving games 1" is satisfied. ``end of round'' is set to ``the variable display of the special symbol is performed once'' without counting the variable display of the normal symbol.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine has a special symbol hit determination table (FIG. 110), a special symbol determination table (FIG. 111), and a hit type determination table of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Since it is common to the table (FIG. 112), normal symbol hit determination table (FIG. 117), normal symbol determination table (FIG. 118), and normal symbol hit type determination table (FIG. 119), detailed explanation will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Special pattern variation pattern table]
FIG. 140 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 141 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol variation pattern table in the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state is the same as that in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so a description thereof will be omitted. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 shows the type of special symbol,
The result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random number value for performance selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table according to the gaming state, etc., refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and production selection. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the random number value. After determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Remarks" column of FIGS. 140 and 141, "Special electric accessory opening end time" and "Special figure processing end time" are described as reference.

"Special electric accessory release end time" is the opening/closing prize opening 3 that is opened when "accessory object is released"
151 open time. As explained in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "accessory object opening hit", in this embodiment, the opening/closing prize is determined as the disadvantageous "first opening mode". Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric accessory opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the special symbol management process shown in FIG. 122 with respect to the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it means the time from when the special symbol variable display start process (special symbol control state number=0) of FIG. 123 is performed until the special symbol game end process of FIG. 128 is performed.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state and C time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol variation pattern table TC1 shown in FIG.
This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to "4" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" of "accessory object opening" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" of "accessory object opening" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec). ) Any of the above fluctuation patterns "Chance fluctuation A" of the fluctuation pattern "01H" and "Chance fluctuation B" of the fluctuation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. is selected.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as well as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time saving game state, due to the relationship with the variable display time of the normal symbols, , Chance variation A is such that the second starting port 3140 is likely to be opened in an unfavorable opening mode due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146, and short chance variation B is an opening mode in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146. It's easy to become.

In addition, special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to (3)
Similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the selection rates for chance variation A and chance variation B are different. 2nd starting port 3140 in normal gaming state and C time saving gaming state
Chance variation B that tends to be an advantageous opening mode is the special symbol variation pattern table T1
The table is configured to be easily selected in the following order: <Special symbol variation pattern table T2<Special symbol variation pattern table T3.

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, but as described above, as a selection symbol command, , "z6"<"z5"<"z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "special symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to (3) is Focusing on it, it has the following characteristics.

The special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process has a "special symbol processing end time" of "1350
The variable display time of the special symbol is set to be 0 msec.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when it is determined as a "accessory object release hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process has a "special symbol processing end time" of "13500 msec".
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that.

In other words, the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process, and the "Accessory release" pattern in the first special symbol hit determination process. The variation pattern of the special symbol (0BH) when it is determined to be a hit.
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" is the same time.

Here, the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process, and the "accessory object" in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the fourth pachinko game machine, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when it is determined that the game is an "open hit" is a special symbol fluctuation pattern that corresponds to "substantially a special symbol loss." Then, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (which corresponds to a special symbol loss)
01H, 0BH), the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that they all have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Special symbol variation pattern table after limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141(1), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the second starting port 3 in the normal gaming state
The configuration is such that the chance variation B in which 140 is likely to be an advantageous opening mode is always selected.

Similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, chance fluctuation B in the normal gaming state
is selected, the second starting port 3140 becomes an advantageous opening mode, and the game ball enters the second starting port 31.
It becomes easier to hit the ball in the 40s. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the game state will easily shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball will enter the second starting port 3140. By entering the ball into the starting hole 3140, it is possible to substantially shift to a jackpot game state.

For this reason, even if the consecutive games in the time-saving gaming state end due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit judgment process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state becomes "time-saving winning", it will not be possible to play again. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 is configured such that chance variation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". It may be configured such that chance variation A, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state, is selected with a lower probability than chance variation B.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured such that when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

Note that the special symbol variation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are variation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the transition to the normal gaming state is made. Not limited to the first time, for example, when special symbol start information is reserved up to a specific number of reservations (for example, 4 pieces) in response to the special symbol reservation function, a hit determination process for special symbols up to a specific number of reservations is performed. The variable pattern table may be selected based on the above, or may be the variable pattern table selected based on the hit determination process of special symbols up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the special symbol is determined based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. It may also be configured with a plurality of chance variation group A, in which the variable display time of the symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and a plurality of chance variation group B, in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. good.

[6-3-2. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 142 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 includes the gaming state at the start of variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. The random number value for performance selection, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, and the variable display time of the normal symbols are associated with each other. In addition, the random number value for normal symbol production selection is, for example, 0 to 99 (
100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and extracts the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and the information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 3126A. The variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined based on the random number value for selecting the normal symbol presentation. When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 142, "Game state at the end of variable display", "Normal electric accessory opening end time", and "Normal figure processing end time" are described as reference.

The "gaming state at the end of the variable display" means the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may be different from the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts. In addition,"
"Game state at the end of variable display" also includes A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, but since they have little to do with the gameplay of this embodiment, their explanations are omitted in the notes.

"Normal electric accessory opening end time" is the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (
1st release time + wait time + 2nd release time). In the normal game state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 119, only the first opening time of 200 msec is the normal electric accessory. This is the opening end time. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 119, the first opening time and wait time 250 total including the second opening time
Either 0 msec, 4600 msec, or 5600 msec is the normal electric accessory release end time.

"Normal symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 134 with respect to the start information of one normal symbol.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if we pay attention to the "normal symbol processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, it has the following characteristics. ing.

When the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process is The variable display time of the normal symbols is set so that the "common symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" when the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the common symbols is the normal gaming state.

In addition, when the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the normal symbols (02H ), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" regardless of the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, if the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbols is the normal gaming state, in the normal symbol hit determination process. Even if it is determined that it is a "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 will be a disadvantageous opening mode, as shown in FIG. 119. In addition, the fact that the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol loss" also means that the normal electric accessory 3146 does not operate.
Naturally, this is disadvantageous for the player.

For this reason, if the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, even though it is determined as a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process, the variable display of the normal symbols ends. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the gaming state at the time becomes the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the normal symbol hit determination process. is a variation pattern of normal symbols that corresponds to "substantially losing normal symbols" which is disadvantageous to the player. The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all the normal symbol variation patterns corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

Comparing the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 with the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Special figure processing end time (13500msec)” (
140 and 141) and the "normal symbol processing end time (13500 msec)" (see FIG. 142) in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" are configured to be the same time. has been done.

As a result, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, even if a hold function is provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the shift in the variable display start time of normal symbols and special symbols is suppressed. can do.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by 1 are different from those in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and include a process for performing a hold function that holds the starting information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. Although the difference is that the time saving number is not subtracted when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, other processing is the same. The process for performing this hold function is the same as in the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but the differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special pattern variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (S3021
YES), the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the starting information (random value for special symbol jackpot determination, etc.) stored in the special symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After performing the "starting information shift process", a special symbol hit determination process (S3022) will be performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", if the special symbol variable display start process targets the first special symbol, the first special symbol start information shift process is performed in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203. The stored starting information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area ( 1) - Shift to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol, the first special symbol start storage area (
1) When the second special symbol starting memory area (1) to the second special symbol starting memory area (4) replaces the first special symbol starting memory area (4) and the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly shifted.

(Normal pattern control processing)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area. If there is, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed. however,
In the normal symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine,
Similarly to the above "Special symbol starting information shift processing", after performing the normal symbol starting information shift processing, if various random values are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, the normal symbol hit determination processing is performed. I will do it. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "normal symbol time saving management process" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection processing)
Switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 135)
In the first starting opening winning detection process (S3381), the second starting opening winning detection process (S3382), and the ball passing detection process (S3387), the extracted starting information is placed in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol starting determination area. It is processed so that it is memorized. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Starting memory area (1) to second special symbol starting memory area (4), first special symbol starting memory area (1) to first special symbol starting memory area (4), normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal The starting information is stored while referring to the free space in the symbol starting storage area (4). This is similar to the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 143 shows the fluctuation and stoppage of the normal symbol display section 161, the operation and stoppage of the normal electric solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric accessory 3146, the fluctuation and stoppage of the first special symbol display section 163, and the game state. The transitions are illustrated above and below.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal symbol type determination table in FIG. 119, the disadvantageous opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state where the opening time is short (200 msec) is referred to as "short opening". Normal electric accessories 3146 in the C time-saving game state
An advantageous opening mode with a long opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed in response to the "time saving win" is illustrated as "stop with the C time saving symbol", and the opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 that is opened when the "accessories opening win" is achieved. is shown as "accessory opening end time".

In the period (A) of FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are shown, and when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol display section 161 displays the "normal symbol". The variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "loss" has started, and the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to "accessory object opening hit" has started in the first special symbol display section 163. Also,
With the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state has shifted from the C time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to the "accessory object release hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponds to the "special electric The ``special symbol processing end time'' added to the ``accessory release end time'' is set to the same time as the ``ordinary symbol processing end time'' for the normal symbol.

Therefore, at the time of (a) in Figure 143, since the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol is set to the same time as the "regular symbol processing end time" for the normal symbol, the second
The fluctuation start times of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed each time are approximately synchronized.

In the period (a) of FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal symbol display section 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit", and the first
In the special symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to "time saving hit" has started.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended. Afterwards, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends,
The variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG.
As shown in the normal symbol per type determination table No. 9, "short release" in the normal game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol The "normal pattern processing end time" which is the "normal electric accessory release end time" which is the "short release" time added to the "normal electric accessory release end time" is set to the same time as the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol. .

Therefore, even in the period (c) of FIG. 143, since the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol and the "regular symbol processing end time" for the normal symbol are set to the same time,
The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the third time are approximately synchronized.

In the period (c) of FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, in the normal symbol display section 161, the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" is started, and the first special In the symbol display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving win" has started. Further, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state has shifted from the C time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In the period (d) of Fig. 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol win". , the variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

At the time (e) in FIG. 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the gaming state changes to the C time-saving gaming state. As shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the "long release" in the C time-saving game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

As described above, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, a special symbol corresponding to "substantially special symbol loss" is added. "Special symbol processing end time" in the variation pattern (01H, 0BH) and "regular symbol processing end time" in the variation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss"
and the same time (FIGS. 140 to 142). Thereby, even if a holding function is provided to hold the starting information of the normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is possible to suppress the difference in the timing of fluctuations between the normal symbols and the special symbols until a jackpot is achieved.

<Modified example of the fourth pachinko game machine>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the game ball flowing down from the left side area 106 collides with the game nail while passing through the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3.
120 so that the ball can directly pass through/enter the ball. However, the first passage gate 312
6A and the first starting port 3120, game balls must enter a sorting device (for example, a so-called croon, etc.) and only the game balls that have been sorted to a specific outlet by the sorting device. The ball may be configured to pass through/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115 is used as a sorting device, and the game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be sorted to a plurality of outlet ports (not shown) by the sorting device, and the game balls are distributed to a specific outlet port. Only the assigned game balls are the first
The ball may be configured to pass through/enter the passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120.
In particular, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the holding function is not provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the first passing gate per unit time Even if the rate of balls passing through/entering the first starting port 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is reduced, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by using the distribution device.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbol is variablely displayed, the variable display time of the special symbol is predetermined in the special symbol variation pattern table. However, when determining the variable display time of the special symbol, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. You may. For example, when "chance fluctuation B" of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol is calculated which is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol - 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of chance variation B. In addition, if "chance fluctuation A" of the special symbol disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol is calculated which is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that has already been variably displayed. (For example, remaining time of variable display time of normal symbol + 1 second)
, the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of chance variation A. especially,
If a hold function is provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is effective because the end timing of the variable display time of the normal symbols and special symbols can be adjusted in real time.

Further, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passage gate 3126B is provided in the right side area 107 of the game board unit 3010, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, , a second passage gate 312 is installed in the right area 107 of the game board unit 3010.
6B may not be provided.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbols are displayed variably, the time saving number is subtracted to make it possible to shift from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. However, similar to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, after the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the number of time-saving games can be subtracted and the time-saving game state can be changed to the normal game state. good.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state) is counted,
Although a "limiter function" is provided which partially restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state is transitioned after the jackpot gaming state ends when the number of successive jackpot hits reaches a predetermined limiter number, the limiter function may not be provided.

Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, the "accessory object release hit" is determined. but,
When the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, it may be configured such that "accessory object release hit" is not determined.

(others)
In the fourth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the fourth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[7. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called Type 1 pachinko game machine, but whereas the first pachinko game machine had a gameplay mainly based on a "special symbol game" using special symbols, the fifth pachinko game machine 5 pachinko machines use normal symbols.
The difference is that the gameplay is mainly a "regular symbol game", and the configurations of various parts are partially different accordingly.

Further, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not have two types of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. Not yet. For this reason, there is no concept of "priority variable machine,""sequential variable machine," or "simultaneous variable machine," as described above. Note that, similarly to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, two types of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) may be provided.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the fifth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted. .

[7-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 144, a game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 5010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100, and the game panel 5
Various members are arranged at 100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 5100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 144, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine mainly has a first passage port 5126A and a second passage port 5126.
B, the starting port 5140, the normal electric accessory unit 5145, and the special electric accessory unit 51
The configuration and arrangement are different from 30. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage port 5126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). ing. Further, the first passage port 5126A is provided with a first passage switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage port 5126A. Then, the game balls that have passed through the first passage port 5126A flow down the channel on the back side of the game panel 5100 and are discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Second passage gate)
The second passage opening 5126B is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 5145, which will be described later, in the right side area 107, and is arranged so that only game balls hit to the right can pass through. In addition, the second passing port 5126B has a second passing port that detects passage of the game ball to the second passing port 5126B.
A passage switch 5127B (see FIG. 145 described later) is provided. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B is directed to the right side area 10 towards the normal electric accessory unit 5145.
7 flowing down.

The first passage port 5126A or the second passage port 5126B (hereinafter referred to as "passing port 5126A",
5126B"), a normal symbol lottery and a variable display of normal symbols are performed.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when a game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage port switch 5127A detects a game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three When the game ball (game ball) is paid out and the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), the prize ball is not paid out. There is.
Note that when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out, or when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A, the prize balls are paid out. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

(starting port)
The starting port 5140 is arranged in the right side area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). In addition, the second passage port 5126
The game ball that has passed through B is arranged below the starting port 5140 so that it can enter the starting port 5140. Further, the starting port 5140 is provided with a starting port switch 5141 that detects entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a special symbol lottery, a variable display of special symbols, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 5145 is a unit body that integrates a starting port 5140, a starting port switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140, and a normal electric accessory 5146. 107.

The ordinary electric accessory 5146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 5148 (described later in FIG. 145) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 5147.
(see). The ordinary electric accessory 5146, that is, the ordinary electric shutter 5147 is located at the starting port 5.
It is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the starting port 5140 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the starting port 5140. There is. When the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to a non-contact area of the game ball, which is a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball, and reaches the starting port 5140. The plate-shaped ball entry guiding portion does not obstruct the entry of game balls into the game panel 5100.
The game ball is moved to a game ball contact point located at a distance less than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game ball, receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received game ball to the starting port 5140. on the other hand,
When the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part moves to the game ball contact area and prevents the game ball from entering the starting port 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide part , without receiving the game balls that are buried in the game panel 5100 and flowing down to the right side area 107.
Does not obstruct the flow of game balls. In addition, the above-mentioned general power shutter 5147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions
Instead, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be used.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 5130 is a unit body that integrates the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole count switch 5132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131, and the special electric accessory 5133. . The special electric accessory unit 5130 is arranged below in the right side area 107. Note that the special electric accessory unit 5130 may be arranged below the first passage port 5126A or above the center accessory 115.

The big winning hole 5131 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. Big prize opening 51
31 transitions from the closed state to the open state because the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "Jackpot"
Or when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived. A specified number of big winning openings 5131 (
For example, up to 10 game balls can be entered, and when a game ball enters the big winning hole 5131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) corresponding to the big winning hole 5131 will be paid out. .

The special electric accessory 5133 includes a protruding plate-type special electric shutter 5134 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a special electric solenoid 5135 (described later in FIG. 145) that operates the special electric shutter 5134.
(see). The special electric accessory 5133, that is, the special electric shutter 5134, has an open state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 5131, and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 5131. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof portion that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the outlet 178 side. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof part is buried in the game panel 5100 and the big prize opening 5131 is opened,
Game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the roof can enter the ball. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electric shutter 5134 has a gently sloped plate-shaped roof, and when the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the game ball can roll on the roof. Since it is configured as follows, it is controlled to a small winning game state, and the big winning opening 5
Even if 131 is opened for an extremely short period of time, one or more game balls rolling on the roof can be dropped toward the grand prize opening 5131 to prevent the game balls from entering the grand prize opening 5131. It makes it possible.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Figure 1
45 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine,
It is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, a payout/fire control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the fifth pachinko game machine includes a special symbol display section 5160, a special symbol reservation display section 5161, and a general power solenoid 5.
148, special electric solenoid 5135, starting port switch 5141, first passage port switch 51
27A, the second passing port switch 5127B, and the big winning port count switch 5132 are partially different in structure. Further, since the fifth pachinko game machine does not execute probability change control, the probability change notification display section 167 in the first pachinko game machine is not provided. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process,
The LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol display section 5160 has eight L corresponding to the special symbol display section 5160 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
It is composed of an LED group consisting of EDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5).

Conditions for starting variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for special symbols")
When this is established, a variable display of the special symbol starts in which all or part of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the special symbol display section 5160 alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishing. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived.

(Special design reservation display section)
When the special symbol start information, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is pending, the special symbol pending display section 5161 displays the number of pending special symbol variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol pending number"). ), and the LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol reservation display section 5161 is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b, which correspond to the first special symbol reservation display section 165 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbol is on hold" means that the special symbol startup condition is satisfied after the passing of the game ball to the startup port 5140 is detected and the special symbol startup information is extracted. Refers to the state up to.

Similar to the first special symbol reservation display section 165 of the first pachinko game machine, the special symbol reservation display section 5161 displays the number of reservations for a variable display of special symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b. Display.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The normal electricity solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it moves the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the starting port 5140, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the normal power solenoid 5148, (If it is OFF), the normal power shutter 5147 is moved backward and the starting port 5140 is closed.

(Special electric solenoid)
The special electric solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special electric shutter 5134. When the special electric solenoid 5135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the special electric shutter 5134 is moved backward to open the big prize opening 5131, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized (ON), the special electric solenoid 5135 is turned OFF. ), the special electric shutter 5134 is moved forward to close the big prize opening 5131.

(starting port switch)
The starting port switch 5141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140. When the starting port switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, random value for performance selection, etc.), The payout/launch control circuit 400 uses the extracted special symbol starting information for special symbol hit determination processing, performs special symbol variable display processing, and performs payout processing for a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). You will be given instructions.

(1st passage switch)
The first passageway switch 5127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passageway 5126A. When the first passing port switch 5127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passing port 5126A, the main CPU 201 outputs normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, normal symbol performance) Random numbers for selection, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbols is used for the normal symbol hit determination processing, variable display processing of the normal symbols, and predetermined prize balls (for example, 3 game balls). The dispensing process is performed by the dispensing and firing control circuit 4.
00.

(Second passage port switch)
The second passage port switch 5127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B. When the second passing port switch 5127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passing port 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.) However, the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is used for the normal symbol hit determination process, and the normal symbol variable display process is performed.
Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B is detected by the second passage port switch 5127B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is not instructed to perform the process of paying out the prize ball.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 5132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131. When the big winning hole count switch 5132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131. (for example, 15 game balls) is instructed to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is a device similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, but the display area of the display device 7 variably displays performance identification symbols corresponding to the special symbols in the normal gaming state. The difference is that, instead of, in the normal game state, performance identification symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are variably displayed.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 146 to 153. Note that the fifth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function,
In the following, descriptions regarding the setting functions will be omitted.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability-varying control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2
01 allows the game to proceed in the normal game state or the time-saving game state. In addition, in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, even if probability variable control can be executed by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode.
Although the fifth pachinko game machine does not execute the B time saving gaming state, it may be possible to execute the B time saving gaming state.

[7-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the starting hole 5140, "big hit", "small hit", or "time-saving hit" is determined. The range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination and the corresponding determination value data ("
``Jackpot determination value data'', ``Small hit determination value data'', and ``Time-saving hit determination value data'') are defined in association with each other. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the starting port 5140, the main CPU 201
Based on the special symbol hit determination process using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be ``big hit'', ``small hit'', or ``time-saving hit''.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and a "small win" is determined, and the state shifts to a small win game state, the game ball can enter the large winning hole 5131, and a predetermined number of It is possible to pay out game balls (for example, 150 balls). Further, even if a "time saving win" is determined, the game can be shifted to the C time saving game state and the game ball can be entered into the starting port 5140 again.
Therefore, if the game ball enters the starting port 5140, the game ball will be paid out in response to a "big hit" or "small hit", so in the normal gaming state, the starting port 5140
A game will be played in which the goal is to open the starting port 5140 and let a game ball enter the starting port 5140.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when a special symbol hit determination process is performed. In the case where a "loss" is determined, it is preferable to specify that a "small win" or "time saving win" is determined with a higher probability than a "loss".

In addition, when the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the small win probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the small hit probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the jackpot probability may be set at a low setting. The high setting may have a higher probability, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the small winning probability may be higher at a high setting than a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that, for example, the time-saving winning probability is a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147 is based on the main control circuit 2 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.
Stored in the main ROM 202 of 00

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" and " This table is referred to when selecting the "Symbol Designation Command".

The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of hit when the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is a hit, and the "design designation command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol that is determined according to the winning type. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops.
The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol judgment table shown in FIG. selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 issues "z3" as the selection symbol command. , and select "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also,
When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when short-time hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues "z5 ” and select “zA3” as the symbol designation command.

Note that in the fifth pachinko game machine, although the explanation is omitted, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table shows that when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol display section 5160
(See FIG. 145) This table is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived in accordance with the selection symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display section 5160 derives a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[7-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 148 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the hit type determination table, for the selection symbol command,
The aspect of the jackpot gaming state, the aspect of the small winning gaming state, and the aspect of the gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, and gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) based on the selection symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", the state transition of the big winning opening 5131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. For one round, when the opening time during which the grand prize opening 5131 is open has elapsed or when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening 5131, the grand prize opening 5131 is opened. to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends.

"Aspects of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening state of the jackpot opening 5131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, it indicates the number of rounds and the opening time per round in the jackpot gaming state. ing. The number of openings may be determined so that the grand prize opening 5131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round, or a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided and the grand prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, one round ends when 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 for one round, and every time 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, 15 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131. The game ball (prize ball) is set to be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command "z1" corresponding to "jackpot"
, 10 rounds are determined, and 10 rounds x 10 pieces x 15 prize balls = 1500
When the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds x 10 x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the "small winning game state", the state transition of the big prize opening 5131 from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of opening times. For one small winning game state, when a predetermined number of openings ends or a prescribed number of game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, the big winning hole 5131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, One small winning game state ends.

"Small winning gaming state mode" indicates the opening state of the large winning opening 5131 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of openings and the opening time in the small winning gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of big winning openings may be provided and the big winning opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, 10 game balls are placed in the big prize opening 51 for one small winning game state.
31, one small winning game state ends, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131, 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out. For this reason, Figure 148
As shown in the figure, when the selected symbol command is "z3, z4" corresponding to "small hit" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the number of openings is determined to be 10 or 8, and 10 ×
15 prize balls = 150 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, the opening time for one round in the small winning gaming state (for example, 0.15 seconds) is set shorter than the opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 29 seconds),
In the jackpot game state, the big winning opening 5131 is opened by the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and in the small winning gaming state, the big winning opening 5131 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode.
31 can be said to be open. Furthermore, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small winning gaming state (for example, 150) is greater than the total number of gaming balls that can be paid out in one small winning gaming state (for example, 1500 or 600 balls). It can be said that the jackpot gaming state is an "advantageous special gaming state" and the small winning gaming state is a "disadvantageous special gaming state" than the jackpot gaming state.

"Game state mode" indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state or after the time saving hit, and indicates the settings of the "time saving flag" and the "number of time saving times." In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving gaming state is executed and the type of the time saving gaming state to be executed. The time saving flag = 0 indicates the normal gaming state, and the time saving flag = 1 indicates the A time saving gaming state. The time saving flag=3 indicates the C time saving gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the B time-saving game state is not executed, when the B time-saving game state is made executable, the time-saving flag=2 indicates the B time-saving game state.

Further, the "time saving number" is the number of times the special symbol hit determination process is performed in the time saving gaming state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed. This time saving number is subtracted when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and when the time saving number = 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to "jackpot", the main CPU 201 sets the "time saving flag"
``1'' indicating the A time-saving gaming state is determined, and ``10 times'' is determined as the ``time-saving number''.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets "3" as the "time-saving flag" indicating C time-saving gaming state. ” is determined, and “1 time” is determined as the “time saving number”.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 determines "1 time" as the "time-saving number". It is composed of

In this embodiment, when there is a jackpot, 10 times is determined as the time saving number, and when there is a time saving hit, the time saving number is determined to be 1. This is because the "jackpot" is determined as the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The probability of being determined is low and the situation is premium, so by shifting to the A time saving gaming state of 10 times as the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot gaming state, 10
It is configured so that it can shift to a more small winning game state while being controlled to the A time-saving game state. That is, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time saving times, it is possible to shift from the time saving gaming state to the small winning gaming state, and to make it possible to pay out many game balls.

In addition, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command "
z1, z2", the configuration may be such that "1 time" is determined as the "time saving number" in the same way as when the selection symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time saving hit" is selected.

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 149 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko game machine.
The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variable display time. It is being Note that the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Also, Figure 149
The "Remarks" column is shown for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and determines the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variable display time, and Determine. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal gaming state,
Regardless of the time-saving gaming state (A-time-saving gaming state, C-time-saving gaming state), the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Good too.

After determining the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

The "rewind performance" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 149 means that the common "bonus time basic performance (special performance)" performed over multiple small win game states is This is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that it will continue. The "rewind performance" and the "bonus time basic performance" will be described in detail later using FIG. 170. "
"Full Rotation Reach" is an effect that notifies you in advance that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. "Jackpot notification reach" is a production that suggests that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a jackpot. Specifically, three decorative symbols consisting of the words "Invincible" are aligned. There will be a performance of whether or not. "Short variation" is a short variation in the variable display time of special symbols, but while the shortening variation and small hit game state are being performed, in terms of production, "Bonus time basic production or Bonus time specialization" A special performance will be held.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display for performing the "rewind effect" are shown. The time is configured to be determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is "Jackpot", "Full Rotation Reach"
Alternatively, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol for performing the "reach for jackpot notification" are configured to be determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display time for performing "shortening variation" or "jackpot notification reach" are determined. It is configured to

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is likely to be determined, and the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortening variation" is determined. The configuration is such that a short variable display time is determined by For this reason, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the special symbol,
A plurality of small winning game states can be changed in a short time.

In addition, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the "reach for jackpot notification", when the A time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state is being executed, a performance corresponding to the lottery of the special symbol is performed. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", "
The structure is configured such that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined to perform "reach for jackpot notification", but a "loss" is provided as a result of the special symbol's hit determination process, and the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is It may be configured such that when the game is a "loss", a variation pattern of special symbols for performing a "reach for jackpot notification" is determined.

[7-3-5. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 150 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination disturbance extracted when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery based on the numerical value.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”).
are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 and determines win/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 97, and stores the win/loss determination value data. It is determined as "normal symbol hit judgment value data". In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 97 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time saving gaming state (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest among the normal gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. .

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[7-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 is based on the main control circuit 2 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of 00.

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-mentioned normal symbol win/loss determination value data, the passage port 5126A,
This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through 5126B. be.

"Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

The normal symbol judgment table shown in FIG. 151 corresponds to the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is won. It is specified and specified.

In addition, the "Reference" column in Figure 151 is the combined selection rate of the selection rate for normal symbol hit determination in the normal game state (see Figure 150) and the selection rate for the "Select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol". , it is determined that it is a "normal symbol hit" in the normal gaming state, and as will be described later, the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147
) is used to explain the ``total selection rate in the normal game state'' when the ``select symbol command fz1 when a normal symbol hits'' is determined, which is advantageously released.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines the normal symbol win selection symbol command based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data and the normal symbol random symbol value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the win/loss determination value data of the normal symbol, for example, the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is won is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 162. Select "fz1" as the symbol, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 163
-65535, "fz2" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

As shown in the "Reference" column of FIG. 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol hit judgment value data in the normal gaming state is "98/100" (see FIG. 150), and the selection rate of the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is "98/100" (see FIG. 150). The selection rate of ``fz1'' is approximately ``1/402.06'', and the ``total selection rate in the normal gaming state'' is used to ultimately determine the ``selected symbol command fz1 when hitting a normal symbol'' in the normal gaming state. is set to approximately "1/410.3".

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when winning a normal symbol", the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning/losing judgment value data) is used regardless of the gaming state It is configured to be selected based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 150) and determines the normal symbol win determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 151) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, a win/loss of the normal symbol and a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol win may be determined together.

[7-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 152 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 152, the game state, the normal symbol win select symbol command, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG.
The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. After that, the main CPU 201 executes the determined ordinary electric accessory 5146.
An opening pattern command for the normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of is transmitted to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 3000 msec. decide. Also, the main CP
When U201 is in the normal gaming state, the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2".
Therefore, the first opening time is determined to be 100 msec, there is no wait time, and the second opening time is determined to be no.

Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, if the selection symbol command "fz1" is selected when a normal symbol hits, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined, and the starting opening 51
It is possible to enter the game ball into the 40.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" is selected in the normal gaming state, an opening waiting time of a predetermined time (for example, 10000 msec) is set before the first opening is performed. It's okay. By setting this opening standby time, it is possible to secure time for executing a promotion effect (for example, a display displaying ``Aim to the right!'') that urges the player to enter the normal electric accessory 5146. I can do it. By executing this promotion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a so-called puncture in which a game ball is not entered into the normal electric accessory 5146 even though the selection symbol command "fz1" is selected when a normal symbol hits. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec and the wait time is 500 msec. , second opening time 3000msec
decided on. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, if the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the first opening time 25
00 msec, wait time 500 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, the selection symbol command (for example, "fz
2''), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

In the case of the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined regardless of which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, and the opening pattern to the starting port 5140 is determined. Game balls can be entered.

In addition, even if the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" is selected in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5000 msec. ) may be set.

[7-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is extracted from the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. Random value for normal symbol production selection, variation pattern of normal symbols,
It is associated with the variable display time of the normal symbol. Further, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and based on the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the normal symbol effect selection random value. Then, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "long release" illustrated in the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" in FIG. 153 refers to an advantageous release pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is long, and is used in this implementation. In the form, when a normal symbol is hit in the normal gaming state, the selection symbol command “f
z1'', symbol commands ``fz1'' and ``fz2'' selected when a normal symbol hits in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state. In addition, "short release" refers to an unfavorable release pattern in which the release time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is short (see FIG. 152), and in this embodiment, the selection symbol command "fz2" is used when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state. , and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

"Normal reach" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 153 suggests that the normal symbol hit selection symbol command fz1, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal gaming state, may have been determined. It is a performance that In addition, "Super Reach" is a selection symbol command fz when a normal symbol is hit, which is advantageously released by the normal electric accessory 5146 in the normal game state.
This is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that 1 was determined. Moreover, "special reach" is an effect that suggests that there is an extremely high possibility that the selection symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol winning, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal gaming state, has been determined. That is, "normal reach", "super reach", and "special reach" are performances that suggest the possibility that "long open" has been decided in the normal gaming state, and it is possible for the game ball to enter the starting port 5140. It can be said that this is a performance that hints at what is to come.

In addition, "normal fluctuation" is the normal fluctuation of the variable display time of the normal symbol, and "shortened fluctuation" is the normal fluctuation.
This is a variation in which the variable display time of the normal symbol is short.

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, in the normal gaming state, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data", and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1". When this is the case, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data" and the symbol command selected at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", "normal variation", "normal reach" ”, “Super Reach” or “Special Reach”, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the regular symbols are determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when the win/loss judgment value data of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss judgment value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach"
Alternatively, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing a "special reach" are configured to be determined.

Further, in the case of the A time-saving game state or the time-saving game state C, the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing the "shortening variation" are configured to be determined.

In the case of the A time saving game state or the time saving game state C, a short variable display time is determined as the variable display time of the normal symbol, so that when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the normal electric accessory 5146 can be activated quickly to increase the rate of game balls entering the starting port 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are S3 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).
Although the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and sub-control circuit processing performed in step 9 are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain the same process again with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). Main CPU
201 executes the process of S5001 and then moves the process to S5002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S5001, an address setting process is performed in which the address of the special symbol work area, etc. in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register.

In S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S5002 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S500
2), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol does not start variable display (S5003 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is to start variable display (S500
3), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

In S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. The main CPU 201 is S5
After executing the process of 003, the special symbol control process is finished, and the process is transferred to the main control main process (Figure 2
0 to (see Figure 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable that steps 5001 to S5004) be performed within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described. Figure 155 shows the fifth
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the pachinko game machine.

In addition, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG.
This is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S5
021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S5021 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S502
1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5022.

In S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process in S5022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5023. Note that the main CPU 201 controls S based on the control state number read in the process of S5022.
Processing after 5023 is performed.

In S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5024.
Move to.

In S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S5024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5025.
Move to.

In S5025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S5
The process of 025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5026.

In S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This S5
The process of 026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5027.

In S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This S5
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This S5028
This process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162.

After completing the processing of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 154). In addition, if the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004, and returns the process to S50.
If called in 06, the process returns to S5007, if called in S5009, returns to S5010, and if called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 156
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S50
31), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
If S5031 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5033.

In S5033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. In this process, the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (2) to special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the special symbol determining area (0). The starting information stored in is shifted to the special symbol starting storage area (1) to special symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S5033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 146) is referred to, and the special symbol determination area (0
) A special symbol hit determination process is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value stored in ). In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a small hit, or a jackpot.
In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S5034,
The process moves to S5035.

In S5035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is
This is a process of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (for example, time-saving hit, small hit, jackpot). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 147) is referred to, and the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) is used to execute the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "design designation command". ” is determined. After executing the process in S5035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot), this is a process for determining the type of hit. In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S5035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 148). In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of winnings, but there may be one type of jackpot, one type of small winning, and multiple types of time saving winnings. It's good to have different types. The main CPU 201 is S50
After executing the process No. 36, the process moves to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referred to, and the special symbol is selected based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random value for performance selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0). A variable pattern and a variable display time of special symbols are determined. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referred to regardless of the gaming state, but the variation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the gaming state. The main CPU 201 is S503
After executing the process in step 7, the process moves to S5038.

In S5038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol display section 5160. start. The waiting time for this special symbol is, for example, 2
It will be decremented as a special symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at msec intervals. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S5038,
The process moves to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs time saving termination management processing. In the fifth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the time saving number is subtracted "when the variable display of special symbols is started." In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number counter, and when the time saving number counter=0, the time saving flag is cleared and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled. After executing the process in S5039, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5040.

In S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process,
Special symbol variable display end processing (see S5024 in FIG. 155) will be performed. After executing the process in S5040, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5041.

In S5041, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process (S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
(see) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is S5041
After executing the process, the process moves to S5042.

In S5042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S5042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5043.

In S5043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S5042) and the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation processing (S5043)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 157
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S50
51), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
If S5051 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5052.

In S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S5 in FIG. 155)
015) will be performed. After executing the process in S5052, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5053.

In S5053, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S5053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5054.

In S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter.
As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings or the like may be managed. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 158 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S50
71), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
If S5071 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5072.

In S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S5072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if S5072 is NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S5072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5078.

In S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S5073, if it is determined that there is no small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if S5073 is NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating a small hit (if S5073 is YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S5074 that it is not time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5074 that it is time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5075.

In S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an A time-saving gaming state.
Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time saving flag and determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is 1. Then, if it is determined that it is not in the A time-saving gaming state,
The process moves to S5076 in order to perform C time saving state setting process, and when it is determined that it is the A time saving gaming state, the process moves to S5077 without performing C time saving state setting process. By this process, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the determination of "time-saving win" can be made invalid.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs C time saving state setting processing. In this C time saving state setting process, with reference to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148, the mode of the gaming state (time saving flag and number of time saving times) is determined based on the selection symbol command "z5" for time saving per,
Set the data of the determined gaming state. Specifically, the time saving flag indicating the C time saving gaming state is set to 3 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to 1. After executing the process in S5076, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077.

In S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU
201 performs the process of S5078, and then moves the process to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the jackpot opening 5131 to be opened (S5080), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

In S5082, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the grand prize opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed. will be held.

In S5083, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state specification parameter setting processing (S5
083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter when there is a jackpot. In addition,
In the case of a small hit, processing for clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter is not performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be used in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
It is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300.

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot start display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win start display command when it is a small win. In addition, the jackpot start display command or small hit start display command scheduled for transmission in this process will be sent during the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45).
(see S522), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S5084, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (
It is preferable to perform steps S5071 to S5084 within an interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described. Figure 159
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed,
It becomes possible to execute the next special symbol game. After executing the process in S5092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5093.

In S5093, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end command transmission reservation processing (S509
Do 4). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
It is transmitted to sub control circuit 1300. After the processing in S5094, the main CPU 201
ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5026 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 160 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S51
01 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
If S5101 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening opening/closing execution count counter value. The big winning opening opening/closing execution counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the small win game control process. This corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the process is opened. In addition, the count value of the big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter (big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter value) is stored in the main RAM 20.
It is stored in a predetermined area within 3. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S5102,
The process moves to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the grand prize opening opening/closing execution number counter value is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table of FIG. 148, the upper limit of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and the upper limit of the number of openings in the small win game state is 8. times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of opening/closing operations of the big prize opening is the upper limit (S51
03), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5104.

In S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104)
By doing this and switching the control state number, after this big prize opening preparation process is completed,
The jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S5104, the process moves to S5105.

In S5105, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win end display command when it is a small win. In addition, the jackpot end display command or small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent during the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45).
(see S322), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300. After the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of opening/closing operations of the big prize opening is not the upper limit (S5
103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening/closing execution count counter value. After executing the process in S5107, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S5107.
Move to 5108.

In S5108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big winning hole to be opened is the big winning hole 5 when the jackpot game control process is executed.
131 is determined, and when the small winning game control process is executed, the large winning a prize opening 5131 is determined.
After executing the process in S5108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 5131, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 5131, the maximum number of balls entering the grand prize opening 5131, the number of prize balls when entering the grand prize opening, etc. are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 5131 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening 5131 is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the big prize opening 5131 is opened and closed as separate processes. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process in S5109, the process moves to S5110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 29,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,500 msec or a maximum of 2,000 msec when executing the small win game control process. is set to The maximum number of balls entering the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to a maximum of 10 balls when executing the small win game control process, for example. Big prize opening 5
The number of prize balls when the ball enters 131 is set to, for example, 15 balls. However, the values set or set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning hole opening/closing control process to open the big winning hole 5131. After executing the process in S5110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5111.

In S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111)
By doing this and switching the control state number, after this big prize opening preparation process is completed,
The big prize opening control process (see S5027 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CP
After executing the process in S5111, U201 moves the process to S5112.

In S5112, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Main C
After executing the process in S5112, the PU 201 moves the process to S5113.

In S5113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5027 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. Figure 161 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 5th pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S51
21), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
If S5121 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5122.

In S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of balls that have entered. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145), which counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole, is the value of the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole. . In addition, the big prize opening count switch 5132
The big winning opening winning counter value counted by is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S5122, if the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 5131 is not the maximum winning number, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5123, and
If it is determined that the number of winning game balls in 31 is the maximum number of winning balls, the process is performed in step S51.
Move to 28-1.

In S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S5124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S5128-2. .

In S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 5131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the big winning opening (S510 in FIG. 160)
It is determined whether the maximum opening time set in 9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 5131 has not elapsed (NO in S5123), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 5131 has elapsed (YES in S5123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5124.

In S5124, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5125.

In S5125, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
5125) to switch the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed again. After executing the process in S5125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5126.

In S5126, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Main C
After executing the process in S5126, the PU 201 moves the process to S5127.

In S5127, if the main CPU 201 is in the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the production control command transmission process (S32 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
2), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, the transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG.
55).

In S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5128-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-3.

In S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process,
The jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S5128-3, the process moves to S5128-4.

In S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S5128-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small winning end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

If it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S51
31), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 154). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
If S5131 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5132.

In S5132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state (big winning opening number counter value, big winning opening winning counter value, etc.), time saving hit flag, small winning flag, jackpot flag, symbol confirmed number counter Processing is performed to clear the values, etc. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process in S5132, the process moves to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs A time saving state setting processing. In this A time saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set the aspect data. Specifically, the selection symbol command “z1
” and “z2”, the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to 10. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S5132, and then moves the process to S5034.

In S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. Main CPU20
1 ends the jackpot end process after executing the process of S5134, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. In addition, Fig. 163
It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 163 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 is
The normal symbol game is advanced by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S5
300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S5301.

In S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process in S5301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5310. Note that the main CPU 201 controls the S
Processing after 5310 is performed.

In S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 164. In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 5320.

In S5320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S5320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". ”. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S5
The process 330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 5340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, an opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric accessory 5146 is selected based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command with reference to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. Determine the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time), and set the determined opening pattern. After that, the main CPU 201 sends the normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 to the sub CPU.
Send to PU301.

In S5340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This S5
The process 340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 5350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. When the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This S5
The process 350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol per end processing, the main CPU 201 performs the above-mentioned steps S5310 to S53.
Processing is performed to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in step 40 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control process (S
It is preferable that steps 5300 to S5350) be performed within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S5311).

If it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (FIG. 16
(see 3). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5312.

In S5312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S5312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5313.

In S5313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol win determination stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), win/loss determination value data (``normal symbol win'' or ``normal symbol loss'') is determined. After executing the process in S5313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5314.

In S5314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol.
After executing the process in S5314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5315.

In S5315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. ) Based on the random number for normal symbol production selection stored in
The variation pattern of normal symbols and the variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process in S5315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5316.

In S5316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time for this normal symbol is, for example, 2m.
It will be decremented as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at a sec period. After executing the process in S5316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5317.

In S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process,
Normal symbol variable display end processing (see S5320 in FIG. 163) will be performed. After executing the process in S5317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5318.

In S5318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300.

[7-5. Sub control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by sub CPU 301 of sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S5500).
. In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 executes the process in step S5510.
Move to.

Note that the above-described initialization process (S5500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S5510 to S5580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S5510, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5530.

In S5530, sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). For details of this production mode determination process, see Figure 166.
will be described later with reference to. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5550.

In S5550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5560.

In S5560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145).
Send to. The LED control circuit 306 receives the message (L
Based on the ED request), light emission control is performed to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301
The process moves to S5570.

In S5570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, sub C
The PU 301 ends the sub control circuit main processing.

[7-5-1. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5530 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described. Figure 166 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 5th pachinko game machine.

In S5531, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, a performance pattern that defines the display performance to be displayed on the display device 7, the sound performance to be output from the speaker 32, etc. is determined. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S5531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 executes the process in S5.
Move to 535.

In S5535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 executes the process in step S553.
Move to 6.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5531 in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described. Figure 167
is a flowchart showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S5531-1 that it is a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "normal symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-3.

In S5531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs a variation performance determination process for the identification symbol for performance. This “variable presentation of identification symbols for presentation” is the “long release” of the normal electric accessory 5146.
This is a performance in which a performance identification symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined variation manner as a performance that suggests that the has been determined. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to long opening".

The "opening pattern command for normal electric accessories corresponding to long opening" is, as mentioned above, the selection symbol command "fz1" when a normal symbol hits in the normal gaming state, the normal symbol in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state. These are the winning symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2".

If it is determined in S5531-3 that the command is an "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-4. on the other hand,
If it is determined that the command is not the "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-5.

In S5531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a starting port opening effect determination process. This "starting port opening effect" is a "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146, and the starting port 51
This is an effect to notify that it is now possible to enter the game ball into the ball slot 40. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the production pattern determination process and changes the process to the production mode determination process (
(see Figure 166).

In S5531-5, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S5531-5 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-11.

In S5531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This "special performance" is a variable display of special symbols, a background performance performed during the small winning game state, and is a common performance performed over a plurality of small winning game states. This special performance includes a "basic bonus time performance" and a "specialized bonus time performance", and the sub CPU 30
1 refers to the gaming state and determines the "bonus time basic performance" when the game is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state C, and the "specialized bonus time performance" when it is in the time-saving gaming state A.
Determine. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process that determines the special symbol variation effect during the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation performance determination process, a performance pattern for performing a "rewind performance" is determined when it is a "variation pattern command per time saving" so as to correspond to the performance in "Notes" in FIG. 149, When it is a "jackpot variation pattern command", a production pattern for performing "full rotation reach" or "jackpot notification reach" is determined, and when it is a "small win variation pattern command", a "shortened variation" or "jackpot variation" is determined. Determine the performance pattern for conducting “Notification Reach”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-8, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S5531-8 that it is a “small hit start display command”, sub-C
The PU 301 moves the process to S5531-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-10.

In S5531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This process is the same as S5531-6 above, and when in the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time basic performance" is determined, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time specialized performance" is determined. do. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big hit start display command".

If it is determined in S5531-10 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs bonus time special performance determination processing to determine the "bonus time special performance". When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301
, ends the performance pattern determination process and returns the process to the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-12, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S5531-12 that it is a “gaming state specification command”, sub-C
The PU 301 moves the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-14.

In S5531-13, the sub CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process to set the gaming state according to the type of the gaming state designation command. Specifically, if it is a gaming state designation command indicating a normal gaming state, normal gaming state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if it is a gaming state designation command indicating an A time-saving gaming state, it is set to A time-saving gaming. The state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303, and if the game state designation command indicates the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-14, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. After that, the sub CPU 301
After executing the process of S5084, the production pattern determination process is ended and the process returns to the production mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "Bonus time basic performance or bonus time specialized performance (special performance)", "
The details of the "rewind effect" and the "starting port opening effect" will be described later using FIG. 170.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the transition of the gaming state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the regular game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first passage port 5126A, a "normal symbol hit" is determined by a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination), and a normal electric win is determined. Normal symbol hit selection symbol command f corresponding to “Long Open” of object 5146
By determining z1 (probability of about 1/420.3), the game ball can enter the starting port 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting port 5140, starting information of the special symbol is extracted. In this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, the special symbol determination area (0) of the relevant determination, the four special Starting information is stored in the symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4), and a total of five special symbol drawings (special symbol winning determination) will be performed.

When it is determined as a "jackpot" with a first probability (probability of approximately 1/319) by the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination), a transition is made to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, in a 10-round jackpot game state, 1500 game balls can be paid out, and in a 4-round jackpot game state, 600 game balls can be paid out. It is composed of

The second probability (probability of approximately 1/1.64) is determined by special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination)
When it is determined that there is a "small win", the game shifts to a small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, 150 game balls can be paid out in the small winning game state. It should be noted that the gaming state does not shift after shifting to the small winning gaming state.

The third probability (approximately 1/2.59 probability) is determined by special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination)
If it is determined that it is a "time saving win", the game shifts to the time saving game state C.

After transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the game shifts to A time-saving gaming state. This time-saving game state A is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "10 time-savings completed (see Figure 148)" or "transition to jackpot game state" as the end condition of the time-saving game state A. ing.

In the C time saving game state, the end condition for the C time saving game state is "1 time saving number completed (Fig. 148)".
(see)" and "transition to jackpot gaming state" are set to be satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the counting of the "time saving number" is performed when the variable display of the special symbol starts, but it may be performed when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In the A time-saving game state and the time-saving game state C, the "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed (see FIG. 152), so it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the special symbol is displayed again. You can take part in the lottery.

In this embodiment, a loss is not determined in the special symbol lottery, and the starting hole 5140
When a game ball enters the ball, it is determined whether it is a "big hit,""smallhit," or "time-saving win." If a "big hit" or "small win" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is given, and if a "time-saving hit" is determined, the time-saving game state C is entered. Then, the game ball can be entered into the starting port 5140 again, and the "bonus time" can be further extended. In addition, as described above, it may be configured such that "loss" is determined with a relatively low probability in the special symbol lottery.

By the way, the A time-saving game state is set so that the number of time-savings is greater than that in the C time-saving game state. Therefore, if a "time-saving win" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the A-time-saving gaming state, the player will be transferred from the A-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state due to the determination of the "time-saving winning". In this case, there is a possibility that the number of time saving operations that could be executed may be reduced, and as a result, the player may be disadvantaged.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko game machine, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the time-saving game state A, a process is performed to invalidate the determination of the "time-saving win" (FIG. 15).
By executing the process of S5075 shown in 8), control is performed so as not to shift from the A time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state. Therefore, even if a ``time-saving win'' is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the current time-saving game state A can be continued to be executed.

In addition, if the starting information that determines the "time-saving hit" remains in the pending memory after the end of the A-time-saving gaming state, C is based on the starting information that determines the "time-saving winning". Since it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state, even when shifting to the A-time-saving gaming state, the possibility that the time-saving gaming state will continue again is maintained.

In addition, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the C-time saving game state,
Like the first pachinko game machine, it would be ideal to configure the new C time-saving gaming state to be executed over and over again, but in order to simplify the control process, the C time-saving gaming state should be executed in the same way as the A time-saving gaming state. It may also be configured such that the determination of C time saving is made invalid during the process.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the time-saving gaming state A and C are the time-saving gaming states.
It has two time-saving gaming states, but like the first pachinko machine, A
It may be provided with three time-saving game states: a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state B, and a time-saving game state C.

[7-7. Bonus time explanation]
As described above, a "bonus time" is provided when a game ball enters the starting port 5140. The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be explained. Figure 169 shows the fifth
It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining bonus time in the pachinko game machine.

Here, in FIG. 169, from the top, "judgment order" of the special symbol lottery, "applicable" indicating the special symbol determination area (0), and "" indicating the special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) The starting information stored in the "relevant" and "suspended memories" is shown as a "circle". In addition, the "circle" in the starting information is "small" when the starting information determines a small hit;
When the starting information determines a time-saving win, "hour" is shown, and when the starting information determines a jackpot, "large" is shown.

FIG. 169(a) shows that the “long opening” of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed and the starting port 5140
This is an example when five or more game balls enter the ball and a "small win" is determined in all the special symbol drawings.

As shown in FIG. 169(a), if a "small win" is determined in all the special symbol drawings, a total of five small win games have been played and the bonus time has ended. Figure 16
In the case shown in 9(a), small winning games x 5 times = 150 x 5 = 600 game balls can be paid out.

FIG. 169(b) shows that the “long opening” of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed and the starting port 5140
This is an example of when five or more game balls enter the game and a "time-saving hit" is determined in the lottery of the fifth special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, "small win" is determined. It is determined that the game has won a time-saving game, and after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state C.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the 5th special symbol is drawn, "applicable" and "retention memory 1 to 4" are set to default data (
(blank data) (all the starting information of "applicable" and "holding memory 1 to 4" has been digested), when five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, C With the time-saving gaming state as a trigger, five pieces of starting information will be newly stored in the "applicable" and "pending memory".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery for the 6th and 7th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and a small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 8th special symbol, again"
It is determined that the game has won a time-saving game, and after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state C.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, the "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the 8th special symbol is drawn, the starting information has already been stored in "Applicable" and "Pending Memory 1", and "Pending Memory 2 to 4" are default data (blank data). When three or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, three pieces of starting information will be newly stored in the "hold memories 2 to 4" with the C time-saving gaming state as a trigger.

Thereafter, in the lottery of the 9th to 13th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, a small win game is carried out, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), small winning games x 11 times = 150 x 11 = 1650 game balls can be paid out.

FIG. 169(c) shows that the “long opening” of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed and the starting port 5140
This is an example of when five or more game balls enter the game and a "jackpot" is determined in the lottery of the fifth special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, " Jackpot”
is determined, and after the end of the jackpot game state, a transition is made to the time-saving game state A.

As mentioned above, in the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times is set to 10 (see FIG. 148, etc.),
The A time-saving gaming state can be continued until the special symbol lottery is held 10 times. In the A time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball cannot enter the starting port 5140 again. It becomes possible.

Then, if the 5th special symbol lottery is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state ends, the A time-saving gaming state is entered, and the 6th to 15th 10 special symbol drawings are performed in the A time-saving gaming state. I will do it.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols in the A time-saving game state, it is determined that the ``time-saving win'' is won. However, as mentioned above, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the time-saving gaming state A, the process of invalidating the "time-saving win" determination (
By executing the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158, it is possible to continue to execute the A time saving gaming state without shifting from the A time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

The 16th to 19th special symbols are drawn based on the starting information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining pending information") stored in "holding memories 1 to 4" after the end of the A time-saving gaming state. It is a lottery of designs.

In the lottery for the 19th special symbol based on the remaining pending information, it is determined that it will be a "short time win". The lottery for this 19th special symbol is carried out in the normal gaming state after the A time-saving gaming state has ended, so after the "time-saving win" is determined, the C This will shift to a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the time-saving gaming state A ends, it is possible to continue the time-saving gaming state again based on the remaining pending information.
It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the end of the time-saving game state.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the lottery of the 19th special symbol, "applicable" and "reserved memory 1 to 4" are default data (blank data), so five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140. Therefore, with the time-saving gaming state C as a trigger, five pieces of starting information are newly stored in the "applicable" and "pending memory".

Thereafter, in the lottery of the 20th to 24th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, a small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), the “jackpot” in the fifth special symbol lottery is “1”.
0R", the total of "4500 pieces" is the sum of the jackpot game (10R) x 1 time = 1500 x 1 = "1500 pieces" and the small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000 pieces". Game balls can be paid out. In addition, the "jackpot" in the 5th special symbol lottery is "
4R", the total of "3600 pieces" is the sum of the jackpot game (4R) x 1 time = 600 x 1 = "600 pieces" and the small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000 pieces". Game balls can be paid out.

In this manner, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, if a "time saving win" is determined in the special symbol lottery, the "bonus time" can be extended. This makes it possible to make the end time of the "bonus time" variable, allowing the player to enjoy seeing how long the bonus time lasts, thereby further increasing the interest of the game. Note that the condition for ending the bonus time is that "a small hit is determined five times in a row in the special symbol lottery."

[7-8. Bonus time production]
Next, the production of "Bonus Time" will be explained. FIG. 170 is an example of a display image explaining the bonus time performance in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Production when the time is shortened during bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of Figure 170 indicate "time saving per" during bonus time.
This is an example of a display image explaining the effect when
This corresponds to the lottery of the th special symbol.

FIG. 170(a-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 169(b) described above This corresponds to

The "bonus time basic performance" is a performance that is commonly performed during the variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or C time-saving game state and during the small winning game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic performance" receives a gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, and when the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state is in effect, the special symbol variation pattern command is executed. This is the effect that is performed when the small winning start display command is received in the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a-1), as the "basic bonus time effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and "bonus time" is displayed at the upper center of the display area. , "Right hit" is displayed on the upper right side of the display area to inform you of the legal game mode. Further, a predetermined character image is displayed in the center of the display area, and the "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are displayed in the lower right part of the display area.

Here, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R in accordance with the bonus time ending condition that "small wins are determined 5 times in a row in the special symbol lottery." It is something. In addition, the "total number of rounds" displays the total number of times the game has been controlled in the small win gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The “obtained points” are displayed as the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening 5131.

FIG. 170(b-1) is an example of a display image of a "rewind effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a time-saving hit is determined by the special symbol lottery, and is shown in FIG. 169 described above.
This corresponds to the lottery of the fifth special symbol in (b).

The "rewind performance" is a performance that is performed when a time-saving special symbol variation pattern command is received (see Figure 149), and the bonus time basic performance is rewound and there is a possibility that the small win game state will continue further. This is a performance that suggests that there is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-1), as a rewind effect, a display is performed as if the video of the basic bonus time effect up to now is being rewound.

FIG. 170(c-1) is an example of a display image of the "starting port opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 170(b-1) is performed. .

The "starting port opening performance" is a performance that notifies that the game ball can enter the starting port 5140. Specifically, the "starting opening opening effect" is performed when the variable display of special symbols per time saving is finished and a gaming state designation command indicating the C time saving gaming state is being received, or when the game ball is in the second passing gate. 5126B, and a normal symbol winning selection symbol command is received in which the long release of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed. As shown in FIG. 170(c-1), as a starting hole opening effect, a message "Aim for the chance starting hole!" is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has entered the starting hole 5140. It should be noted that "Right hit" is still displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

FIG. 170(d-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the starting port 5140 again, and is similar to the above-mentioned figure. This corresponds to the sixth special symbol lottery of 169(b).

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-1), after the "starting port opening effect", the game ball is again placed at the starting port 5.
When the ball enters 140, the "basic bonus time performance" is performed again. In this "basic bonus time effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed incremented (rewinded), and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, the ``rewind effect'' when a short-time win is determined can notify the player that the bonus time has been extended, allowing the player to enjoy seeing how long the bonus time will last and making the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

(Production when hitting the jackpot during bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of FIG. 170 are examples of display images that explain the performance when a "big hit" occurs during the bonus time, and are shown in FIG. 169(c) above. 1-16
This corresponds to the lottery of the th special symbol.

FIG. 170(a-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above This corresponds to “Number of remaining rounds” and “bonus time” shown in Figure 170 (a-2)
, "Right-handed", "Total number of rounds", "Acquired points", etc. are shown in Figure 170 (a).
-1) is the same.

FIG. 170(b-2) shows that when a jackpot is determined by drawing special symbols, the display device 7
This is an example of a display image of "Leach for jackpot notification" displayed in the display area of
This corresponds to the fifth special symbol lottery of 69(c).

"Reach for jackpot notification" is a performance that is performed when a fluctuation pattern command of a special jackpot symbol is received (see Figure 149), and is a performance that determines whether or not the three decorative symbols consisting of the words "Invincible" are aligned. It is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-2), when there is a jackpot, three decorative symbols "Invincible", "Invincible", and "Invincible" are all stopped and displayed as a result of the reach for jackpot notification. Note that when it is not a jackpot, decorative symbols such as "invincible", "x", and "invincible" are stopped and displayed as a result of the reach for jackpot notification.

FIG. 170(c-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and shows the 6th to 15th special symbols in FIG. 169(c) mentioned above. This corresponds to a lottery.

The "bonus time special performance" is a performance that is commonly performed in the jackpot game state, during variable display of special symbols in the A time-saving game state, and during the small-win game state in the A time-saving game state. More specifically, the "bonus time special performance" is a special symbol display when a jackpot start display command is received, and when a gaming state designation command indicating A time saving gaming state is received and the A time saving gaming state is in effect. This is a performance that is performed when a variable pattern command is received and when a small hit start display command is received in the A time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (c-2), "Invincible mode" is displayed in the center of the display area as a "bonus time special effect", and the regular gaming mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. ``Right-handed'' is displayed. Continuing from the "basic bonus time performance", the "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are displayed at the bottom right of the display area. this"
"Cumulative number of rounds" displays the total number of rounds controlled in the small win gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state, and "Acquired points" displays the total number of rounds controlled in the small winning gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131 during the jackpot game state is displayed.

FIG. 170 (d-2) shows that when the A time-saving gaming state ends and there are four remaining pending information,
This is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the 16th special symbol shown in FIG. 169(c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-2), in the "basic bonus time performance" after the bonus time special performance, the "remaining number of rounds" following the bonus time special performance,
The "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are continuously displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has been restarted.

In addition, for the "remaining number of rounds", "4R" is displayed corresponding to 4 remaining pending information, and if there are 3 remaining pending information after the end of A time-saving gaming state, "3R" is displayed, If there are two remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "2R" is displayed, and if there is one remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "1R" is displayed, and the time-saving gaming state A is displayed. If there is no remaining pending information after the end of the process, "End" will be displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time special performance" that is performed during the jackpot and during the A time-saving gaming state makes it possible to create a guarantee period that the bonus time will not end, allowing the player to enjoy the bonus time with peace of mind and enjoy it even more. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the main game in the normal gaming state is not a "special symbol game" consisting of a lottery of special symbols, but a "normal symbol game" consisting of a lottery of ordinary symbols, and a special In the symbol lottery, it is possible to treat the special symbol lottery as a "bonus time", which is an opportunity to receive a payout of a predetermined number of game balls, without determining the "loser", creating a new game experience that has never existed before. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a "time-saving win" is determined in the special symbol lottery, the system shifts to the time-saving gaming state (C-time-saving gaming state), and the game ball can enter the starting port 5140 again, extending the bonus time. I can do it. Thereby, the end time of the bonus time can be made variable, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the performance is performed when a small hit is determined by the lottery of special symbols and shortening fluctuations of the special symbols are performed, and when the small win game state is controlled. The performance is a common "special performance (bonus time basic performance or bonus time specialized performance)", and the performance that covers continuous shortening fluctuations and small winning game states is also a common "special performance (bonus time basic performance or bonus time special performance)". Because of the special performance), it is possible to perform multiple small winning game states as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the "time-saving hit" is determined by a lottery of special symbols,
When the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the basic bonus time effect is rewound, and a ``rewind effect'' is performed which suggests that the small winning game state may continue further.
Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game even when the special symbols are being displayed variably.

<Modified example of the fifth pachinko game machine>
Next, a modification of the embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 170, as a bonus time effect, when a variable display of a special symbol per time saving is performed, the bonus time basic effect is rewinded as a "rewind effect". The configuration is such that the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewinded) in the next bonus time basic performance, but the "number of remaining rounds" is not displayed in the bonus time basic performance. The "maximum number of rounds" will be displayed as the number of times the small winning game state can be executed, and the maximum number of rounds will be added as "maximum round number additional effect" when the variable display of special symbols for short winnings is being performed. It may be configured to perform a similar performance.

In addition, as a basic bonus time performance, a battle performance will be performed in which ally characters and enemy characters fight, and the bonus time ending condition is ``5 consecutive small wins in the special symbol lottery''. The HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, and each time the enemy character attacks the ally character and is controlled to the small winning game state, the HP is subtracted by 1. It may be configured to perform an effect such that the character's HP is recovered.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to perform both a bonus time basic performance and a bonus time specialized performance as special bonus time performances.
The special bonus time performance may be configured as a performance that is combined into the basic bonus time performance. In this case, when in the jackpot gaming state, the "jackpot medium performance" for the jackpot gaming state can be executed, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "remaining round number" of the bonus time basic performance is added to the "time saving" for the A time-saving gaming state. The number of rounds may be added, or "HOLD" or "STOP" may be displayed in the "number of remaining rounds".

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 148, when there is a time saving hit, one time is determined as the number of time reductions, but the number of time reductions may be determined to be two or more times. . Furthermore, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of special symbols (multiple types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to the time saving per are provided and the number of times of the plurality of types of time saving is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time-savings, it is possible to shift from the time-saving gaming state to a more small winning gaming state and to make it possible to pay out many game balls.

In addition, the fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine,
Like the third pachinko game machine, it may be configured as a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, when configured as a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine,
A specific area and a non-specific area may be provided inside the big winning hole 5131 (or other big winning hole to be added), and the jackpot game state may be controlled by the game ball passing through the specific area. .

(others)
In the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the fifth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[8. 6th pachinko game machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained. The sixth pachinko game machine, like the second pachinko game machine, is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. However, the sixth pachinko game machine differs from the second pachinko game machine in the basic specifications of playability, and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are partially different.

Hereinafter, in describing the embodiment of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted. .

The sixth pachinko game machine is a "simultaneous variable machine" that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be a "priority variable machine" in which any one of the starting conditions is satisfied with priority, or a "sequential variable machine" in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the winning order including the first starting port and the second starting port. It may be.

[8-1. Exterior configuration]
The external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from that of the first pachinko game machine in that the effect button device 6310 (first effect operation unit 6311) provided on the upper plate 51
have different configurations.

The production button device 6310 is an operation device that allows the player to perform operations regarding production. In particular, the performance button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured to be able to change its operation mode, and the performance function can be improved by changing the operation mode of the performance button device 6310.

Below, changes in the operation mode of the production button device 6310 will be explained.

[8-2. Operation mode of production button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing a change in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 172(a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the first operation mode as the initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), the first operation mode of the production button device 6310 is such that the first production operation section 6311 that can be operated by the player is located on the top side. When the performance button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first performance operation section 6311.

FIG. 172(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the second operation mode changed from the first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), in the second operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 is rotated approximately 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side by a drive device such as a motor, and the player The operation mode is such that the operable second performance operation section 6312 is located on the front side. When the production button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player presses the second production operation section 6312.
It is possible to press down diagonally.

FIG. 172(c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(c), in the third operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second production operation section 6312 is turned toward the top side. The operating mode is located at When the performance button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, the player can press the second performance operation section 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 172(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(d), the fourth operation mode of the production button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second production operation section 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive section 6313. When the production button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, the player can press the second production operation section 6312 that protrudes upward directly downward.

FIG. 172(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(e), in the fifth operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 rotates to about 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second production operation section 6312 protrudes. The operation mode is such that it collapses backwards. When the production button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second production operation section 6312, which has fallen toward the rear, toward the front.

Furthermore, the production button device 6310 has a built-in vibrating device (not shown), and the production button device 6310 is configured to be able to vibrate. Therefore, in more detail, the presentation mode of the presentation button device 6310 can be configured from a combination of the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

Note that the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is not limited to the above-mentioned operation mode and the number of changes thereof. For example, the operation mode may be such that the production button device 6310 moves back and forth, left and right, or may be such that it simply protrudes upward. Furthermore, the production button device 6310
does not need to have a built-in vibrating device and do not vibrate.

[8-3. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 6010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100.
Various members are arranged at 100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 6100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 173, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine mainly includes a ball passage 6108, a deceleration wall part 6109, and a game area 105. A center accessory 6115 located approximately in the center of the
A, a first starting port (right) 6120B, a second starting port 6140, a passage gate 6126,
The configuration and arrangement of the normal electric accessory unit 6145, the jackpot accessory unit 6130, and the small winning accessory unit 6150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is arranged in the right side area 107, and is composed of a flat plate section tilted downward, on which the game ball can roll. The plate portion of this ball passage 6108 is made of transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is textured. By applying texture to the ball path 6108, it is possible to slow down the rolling game balls, and by applying texture to the transparent resin, the light emitted from LEDs etc. is reflected diffusely, making it a decorative item. It can also enhance your sexuality. Note that the ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-transparent member instead of being formed of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is disposed above the ball passage 6108, and is a surface processed portion in which the surface of the game panel 6100 is textured. In addition to being able to slow down the rolling game balls by the deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100, the game panel 6100 is made of transparent resin so that light is emitted from LEDs, etc. Light is reflected diffusely, and it can also enhance decorativeness.

(Center role)
The center accessory 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 6100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

The center accessory 6115 is equipped with a warp entrance 117, a chance entrance 119 on the stage 118, like the first pachinko game machine, but unlike the first pachinko game machine, there is a circular shape on the front side of the display device 7. It also includes a performance division section 6116.

The effect division section 6116 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7.
The upper display area 7a is formed as the display area of the display device 7 inside the effect partition part 6116.

Further, in the display area of the display device 7, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, while the special symbols are being variably displayed, presentation identification symbols (for example, decorative symbols) are variably displayed to display the special symbols. Displaying the results of the hit determination process, production images according to the results of the special symbol hit determination process,
A performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a suspension image showing a suspension status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed.

(1st starting port)
The first starting opening (middle) 6120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to hit to the right to enter). It has become. When a game ball enters the first starting port (middle) 6120A, the first starting port switch 6121A (
(See FIG. 174, which will be described later), the game ball is detected.

The first starting port (right) 6120B is arranged in the right side area 107 and is provided in a normal electric utility unit 6145, which will be described later. (It is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball.) When a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121B.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port (middle) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B
are collectively referred to as "first starting port 6120A, 6120B", and the first starting port switch 61
21A and the first starting port switch 6121B are collectively referred to as "the first starting port switch 6121A,
6121B".

The first starting ports 6120A, 6120B are activated by the first starting ports switches 6121A, 6121B.
When the entry (passage) of a game ball into the ball is detected, the starting information of the first special symbol (random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, random value for first effect selection, random value for second effect selection, etc.) ) is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted first special symbol is reserved up to the "first reserved number (for example, 4 pieces)". The suspended first special symbol starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Further, when game balls enter the first starting ports 6120A, 6120B, a first number of prize balls (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. However, the first starting port 6120A
, 6120B, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the ball is not limited to this.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 6140 is located in the right side area 107 and is located in a normal electric accessory unit 614 which will be described later.
5, and allows a game ball hit to the right to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

Further, in this embodiment, the second starting port 6140 is connected to the normal electric accessory unit 6145.
When the first starting port (right) 6120B is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right area 107 is placed downstream of the first starting port (right) 6120B. Before reaching 6140, the ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B provided on the upstream side, making it difficult to enter the second starting port 6140. This also applies when the first starting port (right) 6120B is in the time-saving game state where it is likely to be in the open state.

When the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second starting port 6140 is detected by the second starting port switch 6141, the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted second special symbol (
(Random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, random value for first performance selection, random value for second performance selection, etc.) up to the "second pending number (for example, 2 pieces)" that is smaller than the first held number. It will be put on hold. The suspended second special symbol starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process when the special symbol starting condition is satisfied. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a second number of prize balls (for example, one) smaller than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the number of pending game balls for which starting information is held is smaller than when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, and the ball is paid out. The number of prize balls is also set to be small. However, the second starting port 61
It may be set so that the same number of reserved balls or the same number of prize balls are obtained when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A or 6120B. Starting port 61
It may be set so that when a game ball enters the ball at 40, the number of reserved balls or the number of prize balls is larger.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 6126 is located in the right side area 107 and is a normal electric accessory unit 614 which will be described later.
5, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. Further, the passage gate 6126 is provided with a passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the passage gate 6126. Then, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 6126 is directed to the right side area 10 towards the normal electric accessory unit 6145.
7 flowing down.

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 6126 is detected by the passing gate switch 6127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the starting information of the extracted normal symbol (random value for determining whether the normal symbol hits, the symbol of the normal symbol) is extracted. random numbers, etc.) are held up to a third holding number (for example, 4). The suspended normal symbol starting information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process (normal symbol lottery) when the normal symbol starting condition is established. Further, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, the game ball is configured not to be paid out. In addition, the game ball passes through the gate 6126.
It may be configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls pass through.

Furthermore, the passage gate 6126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. Here, the condition for transition to the jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but when the stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, It is possible to operate the conditional device but not to operate the accessory continuous operating device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is located in the right area 107 above (upstream side) of the second starting port 6140 and below the passage gate 6126, so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. It is located in The normal electric accessory unit 6145 has a first starting port (
It is a unit body that integrates a first starting port (right) 6120B, a first starting port switch 6121B that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (right) 6120B, and a normal electric accessory 6146.

The ordinary electric accessory 6146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 6147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a general electricity solenoid 6148 (described later in FIG. 174) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 6147.
(see). The normal electric accessory 6146, that is, the shutter 6147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B, and a first starting port (right).
The state can be changed to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter 6120B.

The general electricity shutter 6147 is gently inclined toward the second starting port 6140 (for example,
It consists of a flat roof section with an angle of 10 degrees. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the open mode, the general electricity shutter 6147 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first starting opening (right)
6120B becomes open, and game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. When the general electricity shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the general electricity shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100, the first starting opening (right) 6120B closes, and the first starting opening (right) 6120B closes.
It becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter B. In addition, when the shutter for general electricity 6147 is in the closed mode, the game ball rolling on the shutter for general electricity 6147 is moved to the second starting port 61.
40 or a small winning accessory unit 6150 which will be described later. Note that instead of the general power shutter 6147 that can move back and forth in the front-rear direction, a blade member called a so-called electric chew that can move in the left-right direction may be used.

(Jackpot accessory unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is located in the right area 107 and above the passage gate 6126. The jackpot accessory unit 6130 integrates a first jackpot 6131, a first jackpot count switch 6132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first jackpot 6131, and a jackpot accessory 6133. It is a unit body.

The first big winning hole 6131 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the first big winning opening 6131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. be. When the first big prize opening 6131 is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state, game balls up to a first specified number (for example, 10 balls) can enter the first big prize opening 6131. When a ball is played, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 are paid out.

The jackpot accessory 6133 includes a protruding plate-type jackpot shutter 6134 that can move forward and backward, and a jackpot solenoid 6135 that operates the jackpot shutter 6134 (see Fig. 1 below).
74). The jackpot accessory 6133, that is, the jackpot shutter 6134 is the first
An open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 6131, and the first grand prize opening 613
The game ball is configured to be able to shift to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the game ball.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is gently inclined toward the passing gate 6126 side (for example, 5
It consists of a flat roof section with an angle of ~10 degrees. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the open state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first jackpot opening 6131 is in the open state, and the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and the jackpot shutter 6134 are buried in the game panel 6100. The game ball rolling above can enter the first grand prize opening 6131. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed mode, the jackpot shutter 6134 is
100, the first big winning hole 6131 becomes closed, and it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 6131. Further, when the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 is guided to the passage gate 6126 on the downstream side.

In the “jackpot game state” where the jackpot accessory 6133 is activated, the first jackpot opening 6131
The state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed up to the maximum number of rounds. For one round, the maximum opening time for which the first big prize opening 6131 is open has elapsed, or the first prescribed number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 6131. Then, the first prize opening 61
31 from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends. Every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 is paid out, so the jackpot game state is a state in which a large number of game balls are paid out. This is a gaming state that makes it possible to pay out .

(Small winning accessory unit)
The small winning accessory unit 6150 is located in the right area 107 and above the second starting port 6140.
Moreover, it is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 6145. Small hit accessory unit 61
50 is a unit body that integrates a second big winning hole 6151, a second big winning hole count switch 6152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151, and a small winning accessory 6153. .

The second big winning hole 6151 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the second big prize opening 6151 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win" is derived. It is. The second big prize opening 6151 allows game balls up to a second specified number (for example, 4 balls) to enter the second big prize opening 6151 when the small winning game state is controlled. When the ball enters, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 are paid out.

The small winning accessory unit 6150 includes a protruding plate-type small winning shutter 6 that can move forward and backward in the front and rear directions.
154, and a small hit solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described later) that operates the small hit shutter 6154. The small winning accessory unit 6150, ie, the small winning shutter 6154, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 6151, and an open state in which the game ball cannot enter the second large prize opening 6151. The device is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state.

The small hit shutter 6154 is gently inclined toward the second starting port 6140 (for example, 5
It consists of a flat roof section with an angle of ~10 degrees. When the small winning shutter 6154 is in the open state, the small winning shutter 6154 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the second large prize opening 6151 is in the open state, and the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 and the small winning The game ball rolling on the shutter 6154 can enter the second grand prize opening 6151. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed mode, the small win shutter 6154 is closed to the game panel 6.
100, the second big winning hole 6151 becomes closed, and it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 6151. Further, when the small hit shutter 6154 is in the closed mode, the game ball rolling on the small hit shutter 6154 is guided to the second starting port 6140 on the downstream side.

In the "small winning game state" in which the small winning accessory unit 6150 operates, the state transition of the second large prize opening 6151 from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of openings.
For one small win game state, the predetermined number of openings ends, or the first one of the jackpot game state ends.
A second specified number (for example, 4) of game balls that is smaller than the specified number (for example, 10) of
When the ball enters the big winning hole 6151, the second big winning hole 6151 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one small winning game state ends. Every time a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 6151,
The second grand prize opening 61 is smaller than the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131.
51, the number of prize balls (for example, 14) is paid out, so the small winning game state is a game state in which it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second specified number (for example, 4 pieces) of the small winning game state is set to be smaller than the first specified number (for example, 10 pieces) of the small winning game state. The second specified number may be set to be the same as the first specified number in the jackpot gaming state, or may be set to be larger than the first specified number in the jackpot gaming state. However, it is desirable to set the second specified number of pieces in the small winning game state to 10 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 6151 (for example, 14 pieces) is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131 (for example, 15 pieces). , The number of prize balls corresponding to the second grand prize opening 6151 may be set to be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131, or it may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first grand prize opening 6131. You may. However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls according to the second grand prize opening 6151 to 15 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first big winning hole 6131 and the second big winning hole 6151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this. The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

[8-4. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained. Figure 1
74 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine,
It is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, a payout/fire control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the sixth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has a general power solenoid 6148, a jackpot solenoid 6135, and a small win solenoid 61 connected to the main control circuit 200.
55, the configurations of the first starting port switch 6121A, 6121B, the second starting port switch 6141, the passage gate switch 6127, the first big winning port count switch 6132, and the second big winning port counting switch 6152 are partially different.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 6147. When the normal power solenoid 6148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the normal power shutter 6147 is moved backward to open the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the main CPU 201 turns on the power. If this is not done (if it is OFF), the normal power shutter 6147 is moved forward to close the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(Jackpot solenoid)
The jackpot solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. The jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
When the jackpot shutter 6134 is turned on (ON), the jackpot shutter 6134 is moved backward to open the first jackpot 6131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the jackpot shutter 6134 is moved forward. The first prize opening 6131 is closed.

(Solenoid for small hit)
The small hit solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small hit shutter 6154. The small hit solenoid 6155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
When the small winning shutter 6154 is moved backward to open the second big prize opening 6151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize (OFF), the small winning shutter 6154 is turned on. is advanced forward to close the second grand prize opening 6151.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switches 6121A and 6121B are penetrating proximity switches that detect the entry of game balls into the first starting ports 6120A and 6120B. 1st starting port switch 6121A
detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (middle) 6120A, and the first starting port switch 6121
B detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 6141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port switch 6140.

(passing gate switch)
The passage gate switch 6127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the passage gate switch 6126.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 6132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 6131. When the first big winning hole count switch 6132 detects the entry of game balls into the first big winning hole 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole, and also counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process for the first prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) according to 6131.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 6152 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 6151. When the second big winning hole count switch 6152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering per one small winning game state, and It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process for the second prize balls (for example, 14 game balls) corresponding to the second big prize opening 6151.

[8-4-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300, like the first pachinko gaming machine, includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, and an LE.
The D control circuit 306, accessory control circuit 307, and command input port 308 are common, but the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a performance button device 6310 are further provided.

(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button device 6310. That is, the button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the production button device 6310,
This is a circuit for vibrating the production button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button device 6310 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button device 6310. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button device 6310, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

(Production button device)
As shown in FIG. 172, the production button device 6310 has a first production operation section 6311 and a second production operation section 6311.
In addition to the production operation section 6312 and the operation drive section 6313 as external components, the internal structure (not shown) includes a first operation section detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball on the first production operation section 6311, and a second production. A second operation part detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball on the operation part 6312, a third operation part detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball on the operation drive part 6313, and a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive part 6313. , a button solenoid for protruding the second performance operation section 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body.

[8-5. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 175 to 185. Note that the sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function,
In the following, descriptions regarding the setting functions will be omitted.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, there is a "normal gaming state" in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, a "high-probability time-saving gaming state" in which a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a high-probability gaming state. The main CPU 201 provides a "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which both the game state and the non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are controlled. It is possible to advance the game in any one of the game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this,
Any one of the normal gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and low-probability time-saving gaming state may not be proceeded with.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 determines the normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left).
For example, control for displaying in the display area of the display device 7 is executed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port and the second starting port are collectively referred to as a "starting port",
The first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as a "special symbol." The hit determination process for the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol lottery" and the hit determination process for the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol lottery". "Special design lottery" combined with lottery
Also called.

[8-5-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 175 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by lottery.

The special symbol hit determination table shows the type of special symbol (starting opening type) and the probability change flag (
(whether or not variable rate control is executed) and the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 614
A random number value for jackpot judgment extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering 0, and a win/loss judgment corresponding to "jackpot", "small hit" or "loss" as data used for the special symbol hit judgment process. Value data ("big hit determination value data", "small hit determination value data", "loss determination value data") are defined in association with each other. The total random number for jackpot determination is 6553.
It is 6.

As shown in FIG. 175, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, based on the probability variation flag and the random value for jackpot determination of the special symbol, A "jackpot" or "loss" is determined as the lottery result of the first special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the probability variation flag is 1 (when probability variation control is being executed), the probability variation flag is 0 (when probability variation control is being executed). , a random number value for jackpot determination is specified so as to determine a "jackpot" with a high selection rate.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU2
01 determines "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" as the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the probability change flag and the random value for jackpot determination of the special symbol. Here, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the variable probability flag is 1, the random value for jackpot determination is specified so that a "jackpot" is determined with a higher selection rate than when the variable probability flag is 0. However, the random number value for determining a jackpot is defined so that the selection rate for determining a "small hit" is the same regardless of the probability change flag.

Note that when the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the small win probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the small hit probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the jackpot probability may be set at a low setting. The high setting may have a higher probability, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the small winning probability may be higher at a high setting than a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 is based on the main control circuit 2 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of 00.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for selecting "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol.

"Selected symbol information" is symbol information for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the winning type when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the display is stopped.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port type) and the first starting port 6120.
The symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the above-mentioned win/loss judgment value data, "selected symbol information" that determines the stop symbol, and ""Symbol designation command" is defined in association with the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 controls the special symbol when the winning/losing judgment value data is the jackpot judging value data. Based on the symbol random number, select the selected symbol information "z1" with a selection rate of 30/100, select the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100, and select the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100.
The selection symbol information "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 00. Then, when the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and the selected symbol information " When "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, when the win/loss judgment value data is the loss judgment value data,
The selected symbol information "z4" is selected, and the symbol designation command "zA4" is selected.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the winning/losing judgment value data is the jackpot judging value data, the PU201 displays the selected symbol information “
z5" and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the win/loss judgment value data is the small hit judgment value data, the PU201 displays the selected symbol information “
z6" and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the win/loss judgment value data is the loss judgment value data, the PU201 displays the selected symbol information “
z7" and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table shows that when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the first special symbol display section 16
This is a table that is referred to when determining the stopping mode of the special symbol derived to the third or second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 174) according to the selected symbol information. Further, a display mode for a jackpot, a display mode for a small win, or a display mode for a loss is derived in the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 based on the special symbol lottery results. Moreover, the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 also has a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) explained in the first pachinko gaming machine.
302.

[8-5-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 177 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The winning type determination table is a table that determines "aspects of the jackpot gaming state", "aspects of the small winning gaming state", and "aspects of the subsequent gaming state (probability change flag, probability change number of times, time saving flag, time saving number of times)" .

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" is the first jackpot opening 6 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state.
131 is shown in an open state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot game state are predefined, and the opening mode of the first jackpot 6131 is as follows: It shows the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state. In addition, you may decide the maximum open time per round,
A closing time (round interval time) for each round may be determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" is the second big prize opening 6 that is opened during the small winning gaming state.
151 is shown in an open state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are predefined, and the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning gaming state is predetermined. Shows the number of openings. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each number of openings may be determined.

Here, than the maximum opening time of one round in the jackpot game state (for example, 28 seconds),
The maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) for one time in the small win game state is set shorter, and the first big prize opening 6131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode" in the jackpot game state. , in the small winning game state, the second opening mode is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode.
It can be said that the big prize opening 6151 is opened.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 3R x 1
The total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 4 balls) is larger than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 4 balls) (Second specified number)
x 14 balls (number of prize balls) = 56 balls) is set smaller, and is the "first special game" where the jackpot game state is advantageous, and the small win game state is the "first special game" where the profit is lower than the jackpot game state. It can be said that this is the second special game.

"Subsequent gaming state mode" indicates the gaming state mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and "
The settings of "probability change flag", "probability change number of times", "time saving flag", and "time saving number of times" are shown.

The "probability variable flag" is a flag that indicates whether it is a low probability gaming state or a high probability gaming state, and probability variation flag = 0 indicates "low probability gaming state", and probability variation flag = 1 indicates "high probability gaming state". indicates the status. Further, the "variable probability count" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the high probability gaming state, that is, the number of variable displays of the special symbol.

"Time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether it is a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and time-saving flag = 0 indicates "non-time-saving gaming state", and time-saving flag = 1 indicates "time-saving gaming state". It shows. Further, the "time saving number" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the "time saving number" is the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot ("normal gaming state" or "other").
The winning type determination table is configured such that a different number of time saving times can be determined depending on the gaming state of the player.

As shown in FIG. 177, the winning type determination table includes "opening mode of jackpot gaming state", "opening mode of small winning gaming state", and "opening mode of the subsequent gaming state" for the selected symbol information. A "probability variable flag", a "probability variable number", a "time saving flag", and a "time saving number" are defined in association with each other.

Based on the selected symbol information, the main CPU 201 determines the “opening mode of the jackpot game state” and
The ``opening mode of the small winning game state'', the ``probability change flag'', the ``probability change number of times'', the ``time saving flag'', and the ``time saving number of times'' are determined. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol information is "z4" or "z7"), the appearance of the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, and the subsequent Since none of the aspects of the gaming state are determined, originally, FIG.
77 is not provided in the winning type determination table. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that if the special symbol lottery result is a "loss", neither the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined. ,For convenience, Figure 17
7.

When a “jackpot” is determined as the lottery result for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before starting the jackpot game state, and selects the selected symbol corresponding to the jackpot for the first special symbol. When the information is “z1”, “opening mode of jackpot game state”
When the selected symbol information is "z2" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, "5R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot game state", and the jackpot of the first special symbol is determined as "10R". When the corresponding selected symbol information is "z3", "3R" is determined as the "opening mode of jackpot game state", and when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, "jackpot game state" is determined. ``2R'' is determined as the ``state release mode''.

Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177, and when the selected symbol information is "z1 to z3" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, the "probability variable flag" is set. ``1'', which indicates a high probability gaming state, is determined as
"120 times" is determined as the "time saving flag", "1" indicating the time saving gaming state is determined as the "time saving flag", and "100 times" is determined as the "time saving number of times". In addition, when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, "1" indicating a high probability gaming state is set as a "probability variation flag".
is determined, "120 times" is determined as the "probability variation number", and "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is determined as the "time-saving flag". Then, the selected symbol information “z” corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol
5", if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the normal gaming state, "100 times" is determined as the "time saving number", and at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot. If the game state is not the normal game state, "10,000 times" is determined as the "time saving number".

Further, when a "small hit" is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177 and selects the selected symbol information "z6" before starting the small win game state. ”, “6 times” is determined as the “opening mode of the small winning game state”.

In addition, after the small hit game state ends, the selected symbol information corresponding to the small win of the second special symbol "
z5'', the mode of the subsequent gaming state is not determined. That is, the gaming state will not shift (change) when the small winning gaming state is triggered.

In this way, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot gaming states are finished, the game shifts to the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" in which both the time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are executed. Therefore, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, it is possible to increase the chance of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state again (providing a so-called opportunity to play consecutive games) and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, the number of variable probability of the high probability gaming state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect to move to a jackpot game state by the time the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the variable number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the time saving number (100) is set to be shorter than the probability variation number (120). For this reason,
After the jackpot game state of the first special symbol ends, the first half (1 to 100 times) of the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is entered, and unless the jackpot game state is changed again, the second half (101 to 120 times) It is possible to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state".

In particular, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the latter half of the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," the expected value of the number of game balls paid out relative to the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1, as will be described later. You can enter the "small hit RUSH". Here, the number of probability changes in the high probability gaming state (12
If the number of times (0 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees a transition to the jackpot gaming state, each time the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the variable number of times, the expected value of shifting to the jackpot gaming state again ( It is common for the so-called expected value of consecutive games to decrease, and the interest in gaming to decline. However, in this embodiment, the expected value of entering the "small hit RUSH" increases as the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the variable number of times, so the expected value of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state increases. The decrease is compensated for by the expected value reaching the "small hit RUSH", and it is possible to maintain the improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the right-handed game is considered to be a regular gaming mode. When you are in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" when playing, the number of time-saving gaming states (10,000 times) becomes the jackpot gaming state. It is set to the number of times that migration is guaranteed. For this reason, when you are in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" (especially the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state"), the second It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player expect to win the special symbol jackpot.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the game ball is in the non-time saving game state where the player is hitting right, that is, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol. The main opportunity is when you are in a non-time-saving gaming state. For this reason, in the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" that can be transitioned to in the latter half after the end of the jackpot gaming state, that is, the "small winning RUSH", the payout of game balls is expected, and the transition to the next jackpot gaming state is delayed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect a guaranteed jackpot with the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal gaming state", the time saving number of time saving gaming states ( 100 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees transition to a jackpot gaming state. This is because when in the "normal game state", left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and entering the game ball into the second starting port 6140 is not recognized as a game feature of this embodiment. This is because it corresponds to "an irregular jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, when the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal gaming state" (if it is an irregular jackpot) time), the same number of times as the time saving number of time saving gaming states (100 times) is set as the time saving number of time saving gaming states (100 times) that is set after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol. However, it may be set to a smaller number of times than the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, or the time-saving flag and the number of time-savings may not be set (the number of time-savings may not be set). (It may be set to 0 times.)

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the transition of the gaming state explained in FIG. 177 will be summarized and explained. FIG. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the "normal gaming state", and "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" ”
In this case, right-handed playing is considered to be the regular game mode.

(Normal gaming state)
In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is performed, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A (see FIG. 173).

In the normal gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol ends. Afterwards, the game will move to a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the number of time-savings is set to "100 times" and the number of probability variations is set to "120 times."

(Highly accurate time-saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is performed, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the passing gate switch 6126, and since the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the passing gate switch 612
6, when the game ball passes through, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. (See Figure 173).

In the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (right) 6120B, the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol After the end of the game, the number of time-savings, the number of probability changes, etc. are reset, and the game returns to a high-probability time-saving game (so-called consecutive games).

Here, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, since the time-saving game state is controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened.
It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140 provided on the downstream side of the starting port (right) 6120B. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140, and the first starting port ( Right) The first special symbol lottery will be held when the game ball enters 6120B.

In the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a jackpot and the number of drawings of the special symbol reaches the set time-saving number (100 time-saving times completed), the control of the time-saving gaming state ends. , the game will shift to a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state."

(Highly accurate non-time saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed, since the time-saving gaming state is not controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the normal electric shutter 6147 is closed. The game ball rolling upward is guided to the small winning accessory unit 6150 or the second starting opening 6140, and the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the second big winning opening 6151 or the second starting opening 6140. (See Figure 173).

For this reason, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port (right) 6120B, and A second special symbol lottery will be held triggered by the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140.

In the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, when a "small hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 6140, the second big winning opening 6151 is in an open state. Therefore, each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 are paid out. In the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. ``HIT RUSH'' is executed, and the number of game balls acquired increases.

In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140, the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol ends. Later, "10,000 times", which guarantees that the time saving number will be transferred to the jackpot gaming state,
The game will move to a ``high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'' in which the probability variation count is set to ``120''.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a jackpot, and the special symbol lottery number after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol is the set probability variation number (12 of the probability variation number).
When the game ends (0 times completed), the control of the high-precision gaming state ends and the game returns to the "normal gaming state" in which left-handed hitting is performed.

(Low accuracy time saving gaming state)
In the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state where you hit right, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" that transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, it is not judged as a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol The number of special symbols drawn after the end of the gaming state is the set probability variation number (12 of the probability variation number)
When the game ends (0 times completed), it is the gaming state to which the game will be transferred.

In the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled similarly to the high-accuracy time-saving game state, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the normal electric accessory 614
6, the first starting port (right) 6120B is in an open state, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

Since the time-saving game state is controlled in the low-accuracy time-saving game state as well as the high-accuracy time-saving game state, the second special event triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140 It has become difficult to hold a lottery for the symbols, and a lottery for the first special symbol will be held when a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

Even if you shift to this low-probability time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of time-saving games is "9880", so it is guaranteed that the time-saving gaming state will not end and you will shift to the jackpot gaming state again. There is.

In this way, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the lottery contents of special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transition to the gaming state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically linked. , it is possible to create unprecedented gameplay and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," in which right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode, are collectively referred to as " This is also called the "right-handed game state."

[8-5-5. Special pattern variation pattern table]
179 to 181 are examples of variation pattern tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 180 is an example of the second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example. Further, FIG. 181 shows the right-handed game state (any of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state") in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 179 to 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the "special symbol variation pattern" of the sixth pachinko gaming machine includes a "first half variation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the variable display of the special symbol, and a "second half variation pattern" corresponding to the second half of the variable display of the special symbol. It is composed of two combinations. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern may be combined into one variation pattern. Further, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are collectively referred to as a "variation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the first half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state is
The type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the winning or losing result of the lottery of the special symbol, and the first starting hole 61
20A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the first performance selection random number, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variation pattern number" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. "Variable display time" is associated with the variable display time. Note that the random number value for first performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 179 shows the contents of the performance for the sake of easy understanding.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the random number value for one performance selection. The main CPU 201 is connected to the first starting port 612
When it is based on the entry of the game ball into 0A and 6120B, the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol are determined, and when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, the second The first half variation pattern and first half variable display time of the special symbol are determined.

Here, the "pseudo series" shown in the "Remarks" column of Fig. 179 means that while the special symbol is being variably displayed, the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This shows a ``pseudo-continuous performance'' in which decorative patterns that have been temporarily stopped are displayed again in a variable manner. It should be noted that the term "temporary stop display" refers to a mode in which the decorative symbols are slightly swayed or deformed, making it appear to the player that the decorative symbols are stationary. This pseudo-continuous performance can be performed multiple times, and the number of times the pseudo-continuous performance is performed is indicated as "pseudo-continuous X times". Furthermore, the term "pseudo-continuation promotion" indicates a performance that incites whether or not a pseudo-continuation performance will be performed.
"NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Moreover, the "long variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long.

“The road to the decisive battle” and “The road to the final battle” are specific performances of the same type, and the players are required to operate the performance button device 6310 a predetermined number of times, and the “road to the ultimate battle” is the same type of performance. It is a performance to collect "character icons". The "number of icons in the first half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed until the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle is performed. The path to the final battle, the path to the ultimate battle, character icons, etc. will be described in detail later using FIGS. 220 to 222.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the symbol, the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time corresponding to any of the following are determined: "Normal variation", "Pseudo consecutive X times", "Road to decisive battle", and "Road to ultimate decisive battle" be done.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 179, in "pseudo consecutive X times",
The random number value for the first effect selection is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "pseudo series 1 time"<"pseudo series 2 times"<"pseudo series 3 times".

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in "Road to the decisive battle" and "Road to the final battle",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Road to the Decisive Battle"<"Road to the Final Battle".

Also, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 6140 (when the second special symbol is used), a first half fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined. .

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when it is in the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and when left-handed hitting is being performed, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140. Although it is difficult or impossible to do so, if the game ball is hit right-handed as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140. However, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG.
When based on the entry of a game ball into a game ball, the first half fluctuation pattern of the "long fluctuation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so the number of draws of the second special symbol per unit time is determined. It is configured to be extremely small so that there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state.

(Second half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 180, the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state is
The first half fluctuation pattern number, the special symbol lottery result, and the first starting opening 6120A, 6
120B or the second performance selection random value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 6140, the "second half variation pattern number" indicating the second half variation pattern, and the "second half variable display" of the special symbol in the second half variation pattern. "time" are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for selecting the second performance is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 180 shows the contents of the performance for the sake of clarity.

When in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 180, and selects the already determined first half variation pattern number,
The second half variation pattern of the special symbol and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the random number value for second performance selection. The main CPU 201 is connected to the first starting port 61
20A and 6120B, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the first special symbol are determined, and when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, the second
The second half variation pattern and second half variable display time of the special symbol will be determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 creates a special symbol variation pattern that is a combination of the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern so that the type of special symbol can be identified. Send the command to sub CPU 301. Specifically, a 3-byte variation pattern command (for example, 83H00H00H) consisting of "83H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" is sent as the "first special symbol variation pattern command". , "2nd special symbol variation pattern command"
3 consisting of "84H", "first half fluctuation pattern number" and "second half fluctuation pattern number".
Send a byte variation pattern command (for example, 84HF1H00H). When the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the total variable display time by adding up the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub CPU 301 is the main CPU 201
Based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the controller, the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 are controlled.

Here, "None" shown in the "Remarks" column in Figure 180 means that the second half variation pattern and second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined, and the second half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. If not, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. Also, "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Battle Reach" are:
This is a reach effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a jackpot in the normal gaming state. The "second half number of icons" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle is performed. The confrontation reach, character icon, etc. will be described in detail later.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, when based on the entry of game balls into the first starting holes 6120A and 6120B, the second half variation pattern of the first special symbol is "None ( ``Normal reach'', ``Ninja reach'',
A second half variable pattern and a second half variable display time corresponding to either "showdown reach" or "big decisive battle reach" are determined.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, in "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach", and "big battle reach",
The random value for selecting the second performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"NinjaReach"<"ConfrontationReach"<"Big Battle Reach".

Also, according to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180,
When based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 61
When the game ball enters the ball at 40, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation" which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in right-handed game mode)
FIG. 181(a) shows the right-handed game state (any of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state") in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols. FIG. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This table is not determined as a variable display time, and there is no need to provide this table, but it is shown for convenience in order to make it clear that the second half variation pattern of special symbols and the second half variable display time are not determined in a right-handed game state. be.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the winning/losing lottery result of the special symbol, and the first starting The first performance selection random value obtained based on the ball entering the openings 6120A, 6120B or the second starting opening 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variation pattern number" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. "first half variable display time".

When in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half fluctuation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed gaming state shown in FIG. The first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the lottery result and the first performance selection random number value. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol, and When based on ball entry, the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time of the second special symbol are determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and does not execute the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. Default second half fluctuation pattern number (00H)
A special symbol variation pattern command combining the above is sent to the sub CPU 301. Then, when the game is in a right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "battle challenge", "battle reach", "door opening performance" and "eye opening performance" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. This is a reach effect that suggests that the result may be a jackpot. Moreover, the "ultra shortening variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, a first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortening variation", "battle challenge", and "battle reach" are determined. Therefore, the "battle challenge" and the "battle reach" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot in the right-handed game state.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. 181(a), in "Battle Challenge" and "Battle Reach",
In order to increase the expectation of a jackpot in the order of "Battle Challenge"<"BattleReach", the first
A random value for performance selection is set.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. 1
The first half variation patterns of special symbols include "super shortening variation", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect".
A first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of the above are determined. For this reason,
The "door opening effect" and the "eyes opening effect" are also reach effects that suggest that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot in the right-handed gaming state.

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "door opening effect" and the "eyes opening effect",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "door opening performance"<"eyes opening performance".

Furthermore, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. The first half fluctuation pattern is determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the first half fluctuation pattern for performing the reach effect is not determined, and all "
The first half fluctuation pattern of "super shortening fluctuation" is determined.

Therefore, when in the right-handed gaming state, unlike the normal gaming state, the number of draws for the first special symbol and the number of draws for the second special symbol per unit time are increased, and in the right-handed gaming state, the player It is structured in such a way that there is a practical benefit to striking.

Here, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, is mainly triggered by the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the right-handed gaming states, In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is likely to be determined as a "small win" (see Figure 175), and if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", the second big prize opening 6151 will immediately shift to the open state. (See FIG. 181). Therefore, in the highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a "small win RUSH" in which the rate of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 per unit time is increased.

[8-5-6. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 182 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" based on the lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”).
are defined in association with each other.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 and determines win/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has a hit determination random value of 0, and determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU
201 is "If the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 1 and 99,
The determination value data is determined to be the "loss determination value data."

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 98, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". Hit judgment value data” is determined. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the main C
If the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the PU 201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

[8-5-7. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 is based on the main control circuit 2 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.
It is stored in the main ROM 202 of 00.

The normal symbol judgment table includes the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbols and the passing gate 6126.
This table is referred to when selecting the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" which determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through. .

"Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 corresponds to the normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is hit. It is specified and specified.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines the normal symbol win selection symbol command based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data and the normal symbol random number value.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the win/loss determination value data of the normal symbol, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win is selected as follows. be done.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49. Select "fz1" as the symbol, and the random symbol value of the normal symbol is 50 to 1.
00, "fz2" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when winning a normal symbol", the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (normal symbol winning/losing judgment value data) The system is configured to select a "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" based on the result of the hit determination process) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 182) and determines the normal symbol win determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 183) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[8-5-8. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 184 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 (normal electric shutter 6147) according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 184, the game state, the normal symbol win select symbol command, and the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG.
The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined based on the game state and the selection symbol command when a normal symbol is won. After that, the main CPU 201 executes the determined normal electric accessory 6146.
An opening pattern command for the normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of is transmitted to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric accessory 6146. Then, 210 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an unfavorable opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the first starting port (right)
It is difficult or impossible to enter the game ball into 6120B.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2" in the time-saving gaming state. , 5820 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the first starting port (right) 6
It is possible to enter game balls into 120B.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6146 is configured so that it is opened only once, but it is configured so that a wait time is set and multiple openings are performed. You may.

[8-5-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 185 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 corresponds to the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variable display time. It is attached.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation pattern based on the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. The variable display time of the symbol is determined.

After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.
Controls the sound production output from.

In this embodiment, a relatively short variable display time of normal symbols is determined so that the number of drawings of normal symbols per unit time becomes large. In particular, in the time-saving game mode, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "hit", the first starting port (right) 6120B
It is possible to shift to the open state, and the first starting port (right) 6 per unit time
It is possible to increase the rate of game balls entering 120B.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and normal symbol control processing performed during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although the control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, The same processing as that performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first performs the second
Load the control state number of the special symbol. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S6001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S6001, an address setting process is performed in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is kept constant. If the value is "0" for more than a certain period of time, a transmission reservation process for a demonstration display command regarding the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

Although the sixth pachinko game machine is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. It is considered a special design. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

In S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6001.

If it is determined in S6002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S6002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S6003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, in S6002
It is judged as O.

In S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. The main CPU 201 is S6
After executing the process of 003, the process moves to S6004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6004.

In S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S6004, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6005.

In S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6004.

If it is determined in S6005 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (if NO in S6005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S6006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, in S6005
It is judged as O.

In S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S6006 and then moves the process to S6007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S6005), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6007.

In S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S6007, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6008.

In S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6007.

If it is determined in S6008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S6008), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S60.
Move to 09.

In S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. Main CPU2
01 executes the process of S6009 and then moves the process to S6010.

In S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S6010, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6011.

In S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6010.

If it is determined in S6011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S6011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process,
The process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S6011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S60.
Move to 12.

In S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. Main CPU2
After executing the process of S6012, 01 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S6
001 to S6012) are preferably performed within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[8-6-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, S6003 and S6 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186)
The special symbol management processing executed by the main CPU 201 in steps 006, S6009, and S6012 will be explained. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, the special symbol management process is S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process.
When the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6006 or S6012 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is the subject to be processed. becomes.

In addition, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG.
This is the control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S6
021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (S6021 is N
In the case of O determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S602
1), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6022.

In S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process in S6022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6023. Note that the main CPU 201 controls the S
Processing after 6023 is performed.

In S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 188. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 executes the process in S6024.
Move to.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S6024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6025.

In S6025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This S6
The process of 025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6026.

In S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This S6
The process of 026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6027.

In S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This S6
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. This S6028
This process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 195.

After completing the processing of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 186). In addition, if the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004, and returns the process to S60.
If called in 06, the process returns to S6007, if called in S6009, returns to S6010, and if called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 188
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

If it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S60
31), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (
If S6031 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S6032 is NO) (judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S6032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S60
32), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6033.

In S6033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. In the shift processing of the starting information of the first special symbol that targets the first special symbol, since the number of pending first special symbols is four, the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 (
Shift the starting information stored in 1) to the first special symbol determination area (0), and shift the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). Shift to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, in the shift processing of the start information of the second special symbol whose processing target is the second special symbol, since the number of pending second special symbols is two, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (1 ) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol determination area (0) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0).
) is shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1). Main CPU
201 executes the process of S6033, and then moves the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175) is referred to, and the game status (presence or absence of a variable probability flag) and the random number value for special symbol jackpot determination stored in the special symbol determination area (0) are determined. Based on this, special symbol hit determination processing is performed. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. In addition, the main CPU 201
sets the small hit flag on when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, and sets the jackpot flag on when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. After executing the process in S6034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6035.

In S6035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is
Results of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, small hit, jackpot, or loss)
This is a process of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to. In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referred to, and the determination result (win or loss) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process,
"Selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine a stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S6035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (small hit or jackpot), this is a process for determining the type of hit. In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determining process (S6035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 177). In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of winnings, but
There may be one type of jackpot, or there may be multiple types of small wins. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, time-saving wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S6036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the first half fluctuation pattern determination process is performed, and then the second half fluctuation pattern determination process is performed.

In the first half variation pattern determination process, in the normal game state, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and in the right-handed game state, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols shown in FIG. Determine, refer to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the determined special symbol, and determine the determination result (win or loss) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process and the special symbol determination area (0).
The first half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the first performance selection random number value stored in the first performance selection random number.

In the second half variation pattern determination process, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol second half variation pattern table shown in FIG. The second half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result (win or loss) and the second performance selection random number stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In addition, in the right-handed gaming state, a default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern is not executed is determined. After executing the process in S6037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, when in the normal gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern tables in FIGS. 179 and 180 are referred to, and the first half variable display time and second half variation pattern determination process of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is performed. A total variable display time is calculated by adding up the second half variable display time of the second half variation pattern determined in . In addition, when it is a right-handed gaming state, the first half variable display time of the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time by referring to the first half variation pattern table shown in FIG. 181(a). . Then, the calculated total variable display time is set to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 are caused to start variable display of the special symbol. The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. The main CPU 201 is S6
After executing the process of S6038, the process moves to S6039.

In S6039, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving probability variation count subtraction processing. In this process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag=1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Note that if the probability variation flag=1, the number of probability variations is not subtracted.
Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag=1 (time saving gaming state), and if the time saving flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the number of time saving times. Note that if the time saving flag = 0, the number of time saving times is not subtracted.

In S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process,
Special symbol variable display end processing (see S6024 in FIG. 187) will be performed. After executing the process in S6040, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6041.

In S6041, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process (S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
(see) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is S6041
After executing the process, the process moves to S6042.

In S6042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S6042, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S604.
Move to 3.

In S6043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the symbol designation command transmission reservation processing, the transmission reservation processing of the symbol designation command determined in S6035 is performed. In addition, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process is a combination of the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of the special symbol can be known. I do. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interruption-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S6042) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S6043)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, S during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187)
The special symbol variable display termination process executed by the main CPU 201 in step 6024 will be explained. FIGS. 189 and 190 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S60
51), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (
If S6051 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S6052), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S60
52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a symbol confirmation time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) of the special symbol is set as the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display section 163, 16
4 to stop the variable display of special symbols. The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process of S6053, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6053.
Move to 054.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may vary depending on the type of hit or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a loss, the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, The second symbol confirmation time may be shorter than the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 24 msec). In particular, when creating a small win RUSH as in the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the pattern confirmation time extremely short in the case of a small win.

In S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S6025 in FIG. 187 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S6054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6055.

In S6055, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6056.

In S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter.
The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of guaranteed changes or the number of time reductions, but the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions can be determined by the number of guaranteed symbols counter. May be managed. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6056,
The process moves to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing (S in FIG. 188).
6034) is a small hit.

In S6057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a small hit (NO determination in S6057), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small hit (if S6057 is YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S6058.

In S6058, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6058, the process moves to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing (S in FIG. 188).
6034) is a jackpot.

In S6059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S6059), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a jackpot (if S6059 is YES), the main CPU
201 moves the process to S6060.

In S6060, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process of 6060, the process moves to S6061.

In S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed variably (S6061
If the determination is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display termination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (S6
061), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6062.

In S6062, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter.
After executing the process in S6062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is
This is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6063, the process moves to S6064.

In S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot or small hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed, and this other special symbol is Even if the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot or a small hit, the other special symbol will be forced to stop due to a loss. After executing the process in S6064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6065.

In S6065, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6066.

In S6066, the main CPU 201 performs symbol confirmation time setting processing for the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is
The wait time of the other special symbol in M203 is set, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 stop variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6066, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6067.

In S6067, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol.
Set. After executing the process in S6067, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S606.
Move to 8.

In S6068, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6069.

In S6069, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. In addition, the other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, the signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187).
).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display termination process of this embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (FIG. 18
(See S6034 of 8) is a jackpot, and when the other special symbol is being displayed variably, a process is performed to forcibly stop the variable display of the other special symbol due to a loss.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 191 is
It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

If it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S60
71), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (
If S6071 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6072.

In S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S6072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if S6072 is NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S6072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S6073, if it is determined that there is no small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if S6073 is NO), the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating a small hit (if S6073 is YES), the main CPU 2
01 moves the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. Main CPU20
1, after performing the process of S6075, the process moves to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the first big winning hole 6131 to be opened (S6077), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

In S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be held.

In S6080, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, when there is a jackpot, the main CPU 201 sets the probability variation flag, the probability variation number,
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as the time saving flag and the number of time saving times. In addition, at the time of a small hit, the process of clearing various flags and various counters, such as a probability variation flag, a probability variation number, a time saving flag, and a time saving number, is not performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent in the production control command transmission process (S in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
322), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot start display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win start display command when it is a small win. In addition, the jackpot start display command or small hit start display command scheduled for transmission in this process will be sent during the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (Fig. 45).
(see S522), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. The main CPU 201 is
After executing the process of S6081, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6082, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state transition determination processing. This gaming state transition determination process includes a "low-probability gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a low-probability gaming state, and a "non-time-saving gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a non-time-saving gaming state. Both processes are performed. After executing the process in S6082, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S608.
Move to 3.

In the low probability gaming state transition determination process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, then it is determined whether the probability variation number = 0. However, if the probability variation count=0, the probability variation flag=0 (low probability gaming state) is set, and the state is shifted from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state. Also, if the probability change flag = 0, the low probability game state transition determination process is ended,
If the probability variation count is not 0, the low probability game state transition determination process is ended while the probability variation flag = 1 is held.

In the non-time saving game state transition determination process, it is determined whether the time saving flag = 1 (time saving gaming state), and if the time saving flag = 1, then it is determined whether the number of time saving times = 0. If the number of time-saving games is 0, the time-saving flag is set to 0 (non-time-saving gaming state), and the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, if the time-saving flag = 0, the non-time-saving game state transition determination process is ended, and if the time-saving number of times is not 0, the non-time-saving game state transition determination process is ended while the time-saving flag = 1 is held.

In S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192. In addition, the main CPU 201
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (
It is preferable that steps S6071 to S6081) be performed within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described. Figure 192
is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed,
It becomes possible to execute the next special symbol game. After executing the process in S6092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6093.

In S6093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. Note that the gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub control circuit 3 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
00. After executing the process in S6093, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S6.
Move to 094.

In S6094, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6094, the main CPU 201
The special symbol game end process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[8-6-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 193 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 6th pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S61
01 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (
If S6101 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6102.

In S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter value corresponds to the count value that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the count value that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the small win game control process. This corresponds to a count value that counts the number of times the control process is opened. In addition, the big winning a prize opening number of times counter value is stored in the big winning a prize opening number of times counter in main RAM203. Main CP
After executing the process in S6102, U201 moves the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the grand prize opening number counter value is the upper limit value. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177, the upper limit of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 3, 5, or 10 rounds, and the opening of the small winning gaming state The upper limit of the number of times is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the grand prize opening number counter value is the upper limit value (S
If 6103 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6104.

In S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104)
By doing this and switching the control state number, after this big prize opening preparation process is completed,
The jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6104, the process moves to S6105.

In S6105, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command as a sending reservation process of the jackpot end display command if it is after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and if it is after the end of the small win gaming state. A transmission reservation process for an end display command is performed (S6106).
The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be sent to the sub control circuit 3 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
00. After the process of S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the grand prize opening number counter value is not the upper limit value (
If the determination in S6103 is NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6107.

In S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S6107, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S61.
Move to 08.

In S6108, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a big winning hole to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the first big winning hole 6131 is selected when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the second big winning hole 6151 is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. be done. After executing the process in S6108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls in the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the grand prize opening, etc. are set. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6109,
The process moves to S6110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 28000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 100 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and to 4 at the maximum when the small winning game control process is executed. The number of prize balls when winning the grand prize opening is 6 for the 1st grand prize opening.
For 131, 15 pieces are set, and for the second big winning hole 6151, 14 pieces are set. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 enters the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 6131, the second
A big winning hole opening setting process is performed to open the big winning hole 6151). Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6110, the process moves to S6111.

In S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111)
By doing this and switching the control state number, after this big prize opening preparation process is completed,
The big prize opening control process (see S6027 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CP
After executing the process in S6111, U201 moves the process to S6112.

In S6112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6112,
The grand prize opening preparation process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. Figure 194 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 6th pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this big winning a prize opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S61
21), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (
If S6121 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 opens the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 6131, the second big winning hole
It is determined whether the number of winning game balls (big winning opening 6151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the grand prize opening counter that counts the number of winning game balls that enter the grand prize opening is the maximum number of winning balls. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 enters the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 6131, the second
If it is determined that the number of winning game balls (big winning hole 6151) is not the maximum winning number, the process moves to S6123, and the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151)
If it is determined that the number of winning game balls is the maximum number of winning balls, the process is performed in step S6128.
Move to -1.

In S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S6124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S6128-2. .

In S6123, the main CPU 201 selects the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 6131, the second big winning hole
It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 6151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 6131, second big winning opening 6151) has not elapsed (if S6123 is NO), the main C
The PU201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6123, the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151)
If it is determined that the maximum opening time has elapsed (YES in S6123), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 enters the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 6131, the second
A closing setting process is performed to close the big prize opening 6151). The main CPU 201 is S
After executing the process in S6124, the process moves to S6125.

In S6125, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
6125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed again. After executing the process in S6125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6126.

In S6126, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S6126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6127.

In S6127, if the main CPU 201 is in a jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is used in the production control command transmission process (S32 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
2), it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, the transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command is not performed. Then, after processing in S6127,
The main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 18).
(see 7).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 opens the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 6131,
A closing setting process is performed to close the second big prize opening 6151). After executing the process in S6128-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6128-3.

In S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process,
The jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) will be performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6128-3, the process moves to S6128-4.

In S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S6128-4, the main CPU 201 executes the process in S6128-4.
Move to 5.

In S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, this jackpot end process is performed in S6 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target.
When called at 028, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S6028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

If it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S61
31 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (
If S6131 is YES), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6132.

In S6132, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various counter values related to the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state (big winning opening number counter value, big winning opening winning counter value, etc.), small winning flag, jackpot flag, symbol confirmed number counter value, special Processing to clear the symbol pause flag etc. is performed. After executing the process in S6132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6133.

In S6133, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state setting processing. In this game state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is referred to, and the probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number are set based on the selected symbol information. Specifically, as shown in the hit type determination table of FIG. 177, after the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol ends, the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state) is set, and the probability variation count = 120. Then, the time saving flag is set to 1 (time saving gaming state), and the number of time saving times is set to 100. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol ends, the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state) is set, the probability variation number of times = 120, the time saving flag = 1 (time saving gaming state), If the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the normal gaming state, set the time saving number = 100, and if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the normal gaming state, the time saving number is set to 100. Set the number of times = 10000.
In addition, after the end of the small winning game state, none of the data of the probability change flag, the number of probability changes, the time saving flag, and the number of time saving times are set. That is, the gaming state will not shift (change) when the small winning gaming state is triggered. After executing the process in S5133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 192 is performed. Main CPU20
1, after executing the process of S6134, ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 196, in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), the main CPU
The normal symbol control process executed by 201 will be explained. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 196 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 is
The normal symbol game is advanced by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S6
300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201
The process moves to S6301.

In S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process in S6301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6310. Note that the main CPU 201 controls S based on the control state number read in the process of S6301.
Processing after 6310 is performed.

In S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 6320.

In S6320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S6320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) of the main R
It is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in AM203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

It should be noted that the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol may vary depending on the type of hit or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and in the time-saving gaming state, the second symbol confirmation time is shorter than the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec). 132 msec). In particular, when creating a small hit RUSH like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time extremely short in the time-saving gaming state.

In S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This S6
The process 330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 6340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146.

In the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146, the normal electric accessory 6146 is released based on the game state and the selection symbol command when hitting a normal symbol with reference to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 184. Determine the pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) and set the determined opening pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 to the sub CPU 301.

In S6340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This S6
The process 340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 switches the process to S.
Move to 6350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This S6
The process 350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol per end processing, the main CPU 201 performs the above-mentioned steps S6310 to S63.
Processing is performed to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in step 40 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control process (S
6300 to S6350) are preferably performed within the interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6310 in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S6311).

If it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (FIG. 19
(see 6). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6312.

In S6312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S6312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6313.

In S6313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol win determination stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), win/loss determination value data (``normal symbol win'' or ``normal symbol loss'') is determined. After executing the process in S6313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6314.

In S6314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol.
After executing the process in S6314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6315.

In S6315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. A variable pattern and a variable display time of normal symbols are determined. After executing the process in S6315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6316.

In S6316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S6315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time for this normal symbol is, for example, 2m.
It will be decremented as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at a sec period. After executing the process in S6316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6317.

In S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process,
Normal symbol variable display end processing (see S6320 in FIG. 196) will be performed. After executing the process in S6317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6318.

In S6318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Production control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 1300.

[8-7. Small hit RUSH]
In the above-mentioned sixth pachinko game machine, it is possible to realize a "small hit RUSH". Below, the mechanism of small hit RUSH will be explained.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the frequency of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 is different from that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). As a result, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning RUSH that can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game ball hit right almost passes through the passage gate 6126 and the normal electric accessory unit 6145. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, it is difficult for the general electricity shutter 6147 to be in the open mode (see FIGS. 182 to 184), and the general electricity shutter 6147 is in a closed state in which it protrudes from the game panel 6100, and guides the game ball rolling on the general electricity shutter 6147 to the second big prize opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140.

Therefore, if the second big winning hole 6151 is open, the game ball hit right will be guided to the normal electricity shutter 6147 and can enter the second big winning hole 6151. Every time a game ball enters the second big prize opening 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, a stop display is displayed indicating a small hit with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see Figure 175). Not only is the mode derived, but also a super-shortening variation with an extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state (see FIG. 181(a)). The frequency of game balls entering the big winning hole 6151 is different from other game states (for example,
(normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state).

In this way, in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a small hit RUSH in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. It becomes.

On the other hand, in a gaming state where the time-saving gaming state is controlled (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the normal power shutter 6147 is likely to be in an open state buried in the gaming panel 6100 (see FIGS. 182 to 184). , most of the game balls hit right enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second grand prize opening 6151 is open, the second
The expected value of a game ball winning in the grand prize opening 6151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example.

In this way, in the game state where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-accuracy time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) that is paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time.
The expected value of is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered to be the regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, since the non-time-saving gaming state is controlled, the game ball hit right will be placed in the second starting hole. 614
It becomes possible for the game ball to enter zero. However, as described above, as shown in the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 179), when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 6140, the variation of the special symbol Since the first half fluctuation pattern of the "long fluctuation" whose display time is set to be extremely long is determined, the number of draws of the second special symbol per unit time is extremely small, and the actual profit that the player makes when playing right in the normal gaming state. It is configured so that it does not.

In this embodiment, the small hit RUSH is configured in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols can be performed without executing electrical support control that increases the frequency of opening the first starting port (right) 6120B by activating the normal electric accessories 6146. Small hit RUSH in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state that is executed
You may make it so that

[8-8. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 198 is an example of the performance flow in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 199 is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

(Production flow in normal gaming state)
In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is performed, a game ball can enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, and the first special symbol can be displayed with variable display of decorative symbols, display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, etc. A change effect on the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. is performed. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of three main patterns: a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and a sub pattern that is much smaller than the main pattern. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to these.

Furthermore, in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the game is mainly about collecting "character icons" and aiming for a jackpot.

When a game ball enters the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 (``start of variation of all symbols'').

When all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform any of the following preview effects: ``line preview'', ``button challenge preview'', and ``cherry blossom accumulation notice''. In addition,
Other advance notices may also be possible.

For example, in a "line preview", one of multiple characters is displayed,
This is a preview performance that suggests that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the first special symbol will be a jackpot based on the displayed characters' lines.

"Button challenge notice" is, for example, when the production button device 6310 is operated multiple times (sequentially).
A preview performance that displays whether or not a predetermined number of "character icons" or "character icons" indicating the expected level of jackpot (e.g., extremely hot) or the content of developing reach (e.g., SP) can be obtained by doing so. It is. Please note that you may not be able to obtain any of the icons from the "Button Challenge Preview".

In the "cherry blossom accumulation notice", for example, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 173), and the cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages. This is a preview performance. Then, when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or a "yakuza icon" indicating that it will develop into a "path to the ultimate battle" will be displayed, and a "yakuza icon" will be displayed. and develops into ``The Road to the Final Battle''. These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to three levels over the relevant change or multiple changes due to pre-reading. The number of character icons is set to increase. The content of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 215 and 216.

Then, when the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 ("5 character icons acquired"), the game progresses to "the road to a decisive battle."

After all the symbols start to fluctuate, after the left and right symbols temporarily stop and display ("left and right symbols temporarily stop"), will it be a "lose" where all the symbols stop and display, or will it be a "pseudo-continuous inciting effect"? It is possible to perform either “Normal Reach” or “Normal Reach”.

The ``pseudo-continuous stimulation effect'' is a performance in which the right symbol, which has been temporarily stopped and displayed, is displayed in a variable manner again (the right symbol slides), and whether or not the ``character icon'' stops at the position of the middle symbol is stimulated. Then, when the "character icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the above-mentioned "pseudo continuous performance" is performed, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle symbol, it becomes a "lose". In addition, multiple "character icons" can also be stopped at the position of the middle pattern.

"Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are the same type of symbol, for example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it becomes a "loss", and when the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in "Normal reach", if the middle symbol does not stop and display and the "character icon" stops at the middle symbol position, it will develop into a "pseudo continuous effect", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, "Ninja reach" will occur. ”.

"Ninja Reach" is a reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach, and is, for example, a reach performance in which a ninja character tries to stop the left and right symbols and the same type of middle symbol. In "Ninja Reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it becomes a "lose", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same kind of symbol as the left and right symbols, it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in "Ninja Reach", when the middle symbol is not stopped and displayed and the "Great Decisive Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it develops into "Great Decisive Battle Reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and a "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 (5 character icons acquired), the "pseudo continuous effect" ”
Without doing so, it develops into a ``road to a decisive battle.''

"Road to the Decisive Battle" and "Road to the Goku Decisive Battle" refer to the same type of identification in which the player operates the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times and collects up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." This is a production of For details on the "Road to the Decisive Battle" and "The Road to the Final Battle", please refer to Figure 220~
This will be described later using FIG. 222.

"Road to the Decisive Battle" is a performance in which the player operates the production button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons" since five character icons have already been acquired. be.

"Road to the Final Battle" is a performance in which the player operates the performance button device 6310 10 times to collect 10 "character icons" since no character icons have been acquired yet.

And the "character icons" collected in "Road to the decisive battle" or "Road to the ultimate battle"
If it is less than 10 ("obtain less than 10 character icons"), it will develop into "confrontation reach",
If you collect 10 "character icons"("obtain 10 character icons"), it will develop into "Great Battle Reach".

"Confrontation Reach" is a reach performance that has higher expectations for a jackpot than Ninja Reach. For example, if an ally character faces off against an enemy character, it will be a "jackpot" if they win, and a "lose" if they lose. It is. Furthermore, in "Showdown Reach", a reach effect will be performed using the "character icons" collected in "Road to Battle". In addition, in the "showdown reach", when the "big battle icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the "showdown reach" develops into the "big battle reach". In this "confrontation reach", details are shown in Figures 223 and 22.
4 will be described later.

"Great Decisive Battle Reach" is a reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot among the reach performances in the normal game state. For example, if your army and the enemy army face off and your army wins, it will be a "jackpot", and your army will It is a reach performance where if the player is defeated, it is a "lose".

(Production flow in right-handed game state)
Among the right-handed game states, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and "low-accuracy time-saving game state," the game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is The first special symbol is given priority, and the first special symbol is subjected to variable display of decorative symbols, display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, change performance of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310, etc. In addition, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", a game ball can enter the second starting port 6140, and the second special symbol is given priority as the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. A variable display of decorative patterns, a display effect of characters, etc., a voice effect, a effect button device 6
310, performs changes in the operation mode, etc. In addition, in the right-handed game state, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is being displayed variably, the special symbol that is being variably displayed is made to correspond to the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. It's okay.

1st starting port (right) 6120 in “high accuracy time saving gaming state” or “low accuracy time saving gaming state”
When the game ball enters the ball B, all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 ("start of variation of all symbols"). In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a disjoint manner in the display area of the display device 7 at high speed ("all symbols ”).

When all the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform either a "prediction inside a jewel" or a "lotus flower notice".

The "prediction in jewels" is, for example, a preview performance that displays the degree of expectation of a jackpot (for example, extreme heat) in the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 173).

The "lotus flower preview" is, for example, a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the opening of the bud suggests that the event will develop into a "door opening performance." The display of the buds can be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations due to pre-reading, and the display of the buds is continued even when the small winning game state is being played. For details on the performance of this “Lotus Flower Preview”, please see Figure 2.
This will be described later using No. 25.

In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it is possible to perform a reach effect of "battle challenge" or "battle reach."

In "Battle Challenge", the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (Fig. 172 (
(see d)), when the upwardly protruding second performance operation part 6312 is operated once (one blow) and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, the first special symbol becomes a jackpot. It is.

In "Battle Reach", an ally character and an enemy boss face off, and each time the ally character attacks, the production button device 6310 changes (grows) in its operation mode, and the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes (grows). This is a ready-to-win performance in which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot when the operation is performed and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls. The content of this "battle reach" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 226 and 227.

In addition, in the ``high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state'', it is possible to perform a reach effect such as a ``door opening effect'' or an ``eyes opening effect''.

The "door opening performance" is a reach performance in which the door gradually opens by operating the performance button device 6310 a plurality of times (sequentially hitting), and when the door is completely opened, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot.

The "eye opening effect" is a reach effect in which the ally character gradually opens his or her eyes, and if the eye opening is successful, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot.

The above-mentioned "development" includes displaying information necessary for the progress of a game or performance, or the progress of the game or performance itself, and includes the progress of the game or performance directly or indirectly. It is a concept that includes. In addition, in "development" that displays information necessary as the game or performance progresses, predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) may be displayed, or the displayed development information may be added or subtracted. It is a concept that also includes doing.

[8-9. Sub control circuit]
In order to execute the above effects, the control contents of the sub control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 200 to 209.

[8-9-1. Normal game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 200 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Design production pattern" is information that mainly defines the variation mode of the decorative pattern for the special symbol, related display effects such as characters, audio effects, change effects in the operation mode of the production button device 6310, etc. means. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, various display effects such as a preview presentation pattern can be executed in a superimposed manner.

In addition, the symbol production patterns in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine include a "pre-reach production pattern" that corresponds to the first half variation pattern of the special symbol, and a "reach production pattern" that corresponds to the second half variation pattern of the special symbol. It is composed of a combination of.

As shown in FIG. 200, the symbol production pattern determination table in the normal gaming state is based on the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol in the first special symbol,
The "number of second half icons" in which the character icons described later are displayed in the second half are associated with the "pre-reach performance pattern", and the "second half variation pattern number" and "number of second half icons" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol are associated. ” and “reach performance pattern” are associated.
Note that when the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "performance end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach performance pattern is executed as the ready-to-reach performance pattern.

In this embodiment, by combining the first half variation pattern number (09H to 10H) and the second half variation pattern number (14H to 16H, 24H to 26H), the reach of "the road to the decisive battle" or "the road to the final battle" is determined. After executing any of the pre-effect patterns 9 to 32, any of the reach effects patterns 4 to 8 and 12 to 16 of "confrontation reach" or "big decisive battle reach" can be executed. And, the pre-reach production patterns 9 to 32 of "Road to decisive battle" or "Road to final battle" are also reach production patterns 4 to 8 of "Showdown reach" or "Great decisive battle reach",
12 to 16 are also determined based on the "number of icons in the second half", so the effects of both are related by the "number of icons in the second half", and if the number of icons in the second half is 10, reach effect pattern 8 of "Great Battle Reach" is used. , 16 are executed, and if the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, reach effect patterns 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 of "confrontation reach" can be executed.

In the symbol performance pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the second special symbol, all the variable pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby performance pattern".

This "standby performance pattern" is a decorative pattern in which the three main symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are kept on standby (stopped display) without being fluctuated and displayed, while the sub symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. This will only cause the display to blink. Even if this standby performance pattern is executed, the so-called irregular fluctuation can be quietly ended without the player paying attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

[8-9-2. Right-handed game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol production pattern determination table for determining a symbol production pattern in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 201 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the symbol performance pattern determination table in the right-handed gaming state includes the special symbol variation pattern command (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), selection rate (first random number), "Design production pattern" are associated with each other.

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, , has been replaced with selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above is explained in Figures 202 to 20.
The same applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in 9 and the like. In this embodiment,
It has many types of random numbers in different random number ranges, and the description of the types of random numbers will be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, the first symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, but the first symbol production pattern and When both of the second symbol production patterns are executed at the same time (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time), the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state"'', priority is given to the execution of the first symbol production pattern, and in the ``high-precision non-time-saving gaming state'', priority is given to the execution of the second symbol production pattern. ,

[8-9-3. Normal game state second half icon number determination table]
The second half icon number determination table for determining the second half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 202 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the determination of the number of second-half icons is performed before determining the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 200) in the normal game state.

"Number of icons in the second half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "The Road to the Decisive Battle" and "The Road to the Final Battle," and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 10. However, the number is not limited. Further, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the "number of icons in the first half", which will be described later, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half"="number of icons in the first half"+α holds true.

As shown in FIG. 202, the second half icon number determination table associates the variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (second random value), and the "second half icon number". It is being

In this embodiment, when the "Great Decisive Battle Reach (Reach effect pattern 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" is performed corresponding to the second half variation pattern numbers (16H, 26H), the maximum number of second half icons is 10. The second half icon number determination table is configured such that the number of icons is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in "Road to the Decisive Battle" or "Road to the Final Battle", the "Great Decisive Battle Reach" will take place.

[8-9-4. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon number determination table for determining the first half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 203 is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "normal variation" and "pseudo continuous effect", and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 5, but the number is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, the first half icon number determination table associates the winning command (first half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (third random value), and the "first half icon number". ing.

Here, the "first special symbol winning command" refers to information for increasing the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, and fluctuation pattern information for the first special symbol ( In other words, it is a command including a first special symbol variation pattern command) and the like. This first
The special symbol winning command is reserved for transmission when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and the production control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45), the information is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. This also applies to the “second special symbol winning command” described later (Fig. 52
(See S403).

In this embodiment, when "Road to the decisive battle" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern number (09H to 0FH), the number of first half icons is set so that the maximum number of five icons is determined as the first half icon number. A decision table is configured. As a result, "normal fluctuation" and "
When five character icons are finally displayed in the "Pseudo-Series Performance", the "Road to the Decisive Battle" will take place.

[8-9-5. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon display scenario determination table for determining the first half icon display scenario in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 204 is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"First half icon display scenario" means to display character icons for the number of first half icons, where,
This refers to information that determines the display trigger, display timing, and number of display items, such as when and how many items to display.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the winning command (first half fluctuation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the determined first half icon number, and the selection rate (
4th random number) and the "first half icon display scenario" are associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Moreover, "the said fluctuation|variation" is the variation display of the decorative pattern performed based on the lottery of the special symbol regarding the starting information which was the object of determination of the first half icon display scenario, and the lottery.

In this embodiment, the first-half icon display scenario is configured such that when one to three pseudo-continuous performances are performed, one or more character icons can be displayed each time the pseudo-continuous performance is performed. Thereby, it is possible to create an expectation that character icons will be added each time a pseudo continuous effect is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured such that one or more character icons can be displayed in the "cherry blossom accumulation preview" or "button challenge preview" before the pseudo continuous effect is performed. There is. The "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" have different execution timings, and both are configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. Normal game state first half icon collection order scenario determination table]
The first half icon collection order scenario determination table for determining the first half collection order scenario in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 205 is an example of the first half icon collection order scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half collection order scenario" refers to information that determines in what display order character icons of the type corresponding to the number of first half icons are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the "first half collection order scenario". are associated with each other.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half set order scenario" is illustrated for reference. Character icons A to E in "Western Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in "Eastern Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "F" to "J". It shows. Further, as will be described in detail later using FIG. 214, "A" and "F", "B" and "G", "C" and "H", "D" and "I", "E" and " J”
Their display positions correspond and they have similar roles.

The last number of the first half set order scenario shown in FIG. 205 indicates "first half icon number" - "display order pattern", and in the first half set order scenario 1-1, "first half icon number 1" - " This indicates "display order pattern 1".

In this embodiment, as the "display order pattern" of the first half set order scenario,
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from A (F) upwards (see Figure 214), such as "A → B → C → D → E (F → G → H → I → J)""Pattern1"
As in "D→C→B→A→E (I→H→G→F→J)," E(J) is the last and D(I
) to the bottom (see Figure 214).
"and,
After displaying D (I), such as "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)",
Returning to (F), there is a "display order pattern 3" in which character icons are displayed in order from A (F) upwards (see Figure 214).
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from E (J) down (see Figure 214), such as "E → D → C → B → A (J → I → H → G → F)" Pattern 4". Note that the number and order contents of display order patterns are not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, "display order pattern 1" is a normal display order pattern, "display order pattern 2" is a display order pattern that improves the expectation of a jackpot, and "display order pattern 3" is a pseudo consecutive pattern. "Display order pattern 4" is a display order pattern that suggests that a battle will be performed, ``display order pattern 4'' is a display order pattern that suggests that a decisive battle path or a final battle path will be performed. In this manner, in this embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed can give interest to the future game content and further improve the interest of the game.

[8-9-7. Normal game state cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table]
A cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table for determining cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 206 is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 206, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table is determined by the "first special symbol winning command (first half fluctuation pattern number)", "first special symbol pending number", and first half icon display scenario. "Number of character icons displayed" displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice (Figure 20
4), the selection rate (sixth random number), and the "cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern" are associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table, "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation notice production pattern" is illustrated for reference. Further, "the variation" refers to a special symbol lottery for the starting information for which the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined, and a variable display of decorative symbols performed based on the lottery. "Preliminary variation" refers to a variation display of a decorative pattern that is started before "the variation in question". Regarding this advance fluctuation, it is executed multiple times depending on the number of reservations of the first special symbol, and if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is 4, advance fluctuation will be executed three times from the next fluctuation, If the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 3, two preliminary variations will be executed from the next variation, and if the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 2, one preliminary variation will be executed from the next variation. will be executed. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a maximum of two advance fluctuations can be executed, but the configuration may be such that a maximum of three preliminary fluctuations can be executed.

As mentioned above, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a notice that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" will be displayed. This is the content that will be carried out. Therefore, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" consists of a staged effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages and an icon display effect that displays icons.

The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but the cherry blossoms are not accumulated. It is also possible to perform a failed preview performance (Sakura accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0). This results in
It is possible to increase the overall appearance rate of cherry blossom accumulation notices and to give interest in whether or not cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, each stage of the cherry blossom accumulation notice develops (cherry blossom accumulation 1st stage notice <
The cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table is configured so that the expectation level for the "yakuza icon" to be displayed and the number of "character icons" to be displayed will be increased in the order of the cherry blossom accumulation stage 2 notice <the cherry blossom accumulation stage 3 notice]. has been done. As a result, it is possible to add interest to the progress of the stage presentation (the accumulation of cherry blossoms) and to further improve the interest of the game. In particular, the stage performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice,
Since it is configured to be executable over the advance fluctuations and the fluctuations concerned, it is possible to improve the interest of the game over a plurality of fluctuations.

[8-9-8. Showdown Reach Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying a support icon in a confrontation reach in a normal game state will be explained. FIG. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" refers to the player's performance button device 6 in the confrontation reach.
The display content is displayed by a support icon in response to the operation of the production button device 6310, and refers to information determined in association with the number of operations of the production button device 6310 and the display content. Further, the "support icon" of the confrontation reach will be described in detail later using FIGS. 223 and 224.

As shown in FIG. 207, the support icon display scenario determination table includes the reach performance pattern corresponding to the confrontation reach (see FIG. 200), the determined number of second-half icons, the selection rate (seventh random value), and ""Support icon display scenario" is associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, a "support icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Here, "line" refers to the character's dialogue that is displayed according to the support icon, "opportunity" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot, and "fierce" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot. is displayed with extremely enthusiastic characters, indicating that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than that of ``opportunity''. Furthermore, "LED" refers to the LED group 46 emitting a predetermined light, and "big battle" refers to the display of a "big battle icon." The content displayed by the "support icon display scenario" is not limited to the above, but includes "Change of pending image" which changes the display mode of the pending image, "Change of pending image" which causes the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) to fall, etc. Characters such as "Accessories for performance" and "Change of performance button" for changing the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, reach production pattern 6 that develops from confrontation reach to big battle reach
, 7, 14, and 15, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "big battle icon" is always displayed. As a result, when the "Big Decisive Battle Icon" is displayed as the support icon for the Confrontation Reach, you can perform the Great Decisive Battle Reach.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower preview decision table for right-handed game mode]
A lotus flower preview determination table for determining a lotus flower preview in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the lotus flower notice determination table includes the "winning command for the second special symbol (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)", the "pending number of second special symbols", and the selection The rate (eighth random number) is associated with the "lotus flower preview production pattern."

As mentioned above, the "lotus flower preview" is a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the opening of the bud suggests that it will develop into a "door opening performance." The display of buds may vary several times (
(ex-ante fluctuation) can be displayed.

Furthermore, the lotus flower preview performance patterns include a "lotus flower success notice" preview performance pattern and a "lotus flower failure notice" preview performance pattern. In the "Lotus Flower Success Notice" preview performance pattern, buds will be displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower notice performance pattern is determined, triggered by the winning command of the second special symbol, and It has a production pattern where the buds open. In addition, in the preview performance pattern of "Lotus flower failure notice", the bud will be displayed from the next variation (pre-variation) after the lotus flower preview production pattern is determined by the winning command of the second special symbol, and the corresponding bud will be displayed. The production pattern is such that the buds disappear when fluctuations occur.

In this embodiment, when the "door opening effect" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern number (41H, 45H), the preview effect pattern of "lotus flower success notice" is determined at a predetermined selection rate. The lotus flower preview decision table is configured. As a result, the door opening effect will be performed after the lotus flower success notice is given.

[8-9-10. Jackpot game state fan preview decision table]
A fan notice determination table for determining a fan notice in a jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 209 is an example of a fan preview determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is such that in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, a fan falls from the display area of the display device 7, This is a preview that suggests whether or not the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area is a jackpot depending on the color of the fan. That is, in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, this is a notice that suggests a so-called pending series of wins. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the "fan notice" is performed only in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the "fan notice" is also performed in the jackpot game state of the second special symbol. You may.

In addition, the "folding fan notice" indicates that the number of second special symbols on hold is the upper limit of two (starting information is stored in each of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) and (2)). ). Incidentally, it may be configured such that the "folding fan notice" is performed regardless of the number of second special symbols on hold.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan advance notice determination table includes the first special symbol start storage area (1
) to (4), and the starting information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to (2). ,
The selection rate (9th random number) is associated with the "fan preview production pattern".

Also, the jackpot information means a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot, and the round information means a symbol random number value for determining the number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In addition, the fan preview performance patterns are "White Fan Notice" where a white fan falls, "Red Fan Notice" where a red fan falls, and "Rainbow Fan" where a rainbow-colored fan falls. There are two types of preview performance patterns: ``Notice'' and ``Golden Fan Notice,'' in which a golden folding fan falls.

In this embodiment, the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Preview" suggests that jackpot starting information of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area, and " In the preview effect pattern of ``Rainbow fan preview'', the lotus flower preview determination table is configured to suggest that the 10R jackpot starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, in the preview production pattern of "Golden Fan Preview", the Lotus Flower Preview Determination Table is configured so as to suggest that the 2R jackpot starting information is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area. .

Therefore, the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" and the notice performance pattern of "Rainbow Fan Notice" are fan notices that suggest the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the notice performance pattern of "Golden Fan Notice" It can be said that this is a fan preview that suggests a jackpot with the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, when jackpot starting information is stored in both the first special symbol starting storage area and the second special symbol starting storage area, "golden fan" indicating a jackpot of the second special symbol is used. In order to make it possible to determine the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" or the "Rainbow Fan Notice" that suggests the jackpot of the first special symbol, even though the notice performance pattern of "Notice" could not be determined, the lotus A flower notice determination table is configured.

[8-9-11. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be explained with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S6500).
. In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 executes the process in step S6510.
Move to.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S6500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S6510 to S6580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S6510, the sub CPU 301 performs data input processing to input data.
In this data input processing, the reading processing of the command input port 308 and the production button device 63 are performed.
Both the input processing and the input processing in step 10 are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the production button device 6310, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the production button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310. Further, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information as invalid, and also determines whether to discard the input operation information as valid or invalid, depending on the current situation of the performance, etc.
Set the reception time for allowing input of operation information, the valid time for validating input operation information, and the invalid period for invalidating input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the production button device 6310 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6530.

In S6530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various production devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. When this process is finished, the subCP
U301 moves the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6550.

In S6550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6560.

In S6560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174).
Send to. The LED control circuit 306 receives the message (L
Based on the ED request), light emission control is performed to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301
The process moves to S6570.

In S6570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, sub C
The PU 301 moves the process to S6580.

In S6580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the production button device 6310 or vibrating the production button device 6310 based on a message (production button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[8-9-12. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6530 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 210) will be described. Figure 211 is
It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 6th pachinko game machine.

In S6531, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, based on commands sent from the main CPU 201, the mode of display effects displayed on the display device 7, the mode of sound effects output from the speaker 32, the mode of the effect button device 6310
A performance pattern that defines the operation mode, etc. is determined. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 30
1, the process moves to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6537.

In S6537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S6531 above. Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Performance pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, S6 in the production mode determination process (see FIG. 211)
Details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in step 531 will be explained. FIGS. 212 and 213 are flowcharts showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531-1, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "first special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S6531-1 that it is a "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of reserved first special symbols,
A first reservation update display process is performed to update and display a reservation image corresponding to the number of reservations of the first special symbol. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-3.

In S6531-3, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state".

If it is determined in S6531-3 that the state is in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301
, the process moves to S6531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs first half icon number determination processing to determine the first half icon number in the normal gaming state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 203 is referred to, and the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs icon scenario determination processing. In this icon scenario determination process, both the first half icon display scenario determination process that determines the first half icon display scenario and the first half set order scenario determination process that determines the first half set order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, the first half icon display scenario is determined.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, determine the first half set order scenario.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half collection order scenario determination process are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub CPU 301 performs cherry blossom accumulation notice determination processing to determine the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal gaming state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination process, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shown in FIG. A cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined based on the number of icons displayed and the sixth random number. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-7, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "second special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S6531-7 that it is a "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-10.

In S6531-8, the sub CPU 301 updates the pending number of second special symbols,
A second reservation update display process is performed to update and display a reservation image corresponding to the number of reservations of the second special symbol. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs lotus flower preview determination processing to determine the lotus flower preview in the right-handed game state.

In the lotus flower notice determination process, the lotus flower notice determination table shown in FIG. Determine the flower preview performance pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big winning opening command".

If it is determined in S6531-10 that the command is a "winning command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "winning command for the big winning opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-20.

In S6531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs fan preview determination processing to determine the fan preview in the jackpot game state.

In the fan advance notice determination process, it is first determined whether or not it is a jackpot game state with the first special symbol, and if it is not a jackpot game state with the first special symbol, the fan advance notice determination process is ended. Next, if the first special symbol is in a jackpot game state, it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is 2, which is the upper limit, and the number of reserved second special symbols is 2, which is the upper limit. If not, the fan advance notice determination process ends. Then, when the first special symbol is in a jackpot game state and the number of pending second special symbols is the upper limit of two, the fan preview determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referred to, and the first special symbol starting memory is A fan preview presentation pattern is determined based on the starting information stored in the area, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area, and the ninth random number value. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S6531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 executes the process in S6531-30.
Move to.

In S6531-21, the sub CPU 301 performs a second half icon number determination process to determine the second half icon number in the normal gaming state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 202 is referred to, and the second half icon number is determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-22.

In S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol presentation pattern determination processing to determine a symbol presentation pattern. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 executes the process in step S653.
Move to 1-23.

In the symbol production pattern determination process, first, the game state is referred to, and if the normal game state is shown in FIG.
The symbol production pattern determination table shown in 0 is determined, and if it is a right-handed game state, the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined.

When the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the determined diagram 200
With reference to the symbol production pattern determination table shown in , if it is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the pre-reach A performance pattern and a reach performance pattern are determined.
Further, if it is a normal game state and the variable pattern command is the second special symbol, a standby performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when the reach performance pattern is determined, refer to the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. 207, and select the reach performance pattern and the
A support icon display scenario is determined based on the number of second-half icons determined in step 1-21.

When the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the determined diagram 201
Referring to the symbol production pattern determination table shown in , the special symbol variation pattern command and the first
A pattern presentation pattern is determined based on the random number value.

In S6531-23, the sub CPU 301 performs other preview performance pattern determination processing to determine a dialogue preview and a button challenge preview. When this process is finished, the subCP
U301 ends the production pattern determination processing and moves the processing to animation request generation processing (see FIG. 211).

In addition, in the dialogue announcement in the announcement performance pattern determination process, in order to suggest the possibility of a jackpot based on the character's dialogue displayed, a dialogue announcement determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined Selection rate (10th random number, etc.)
Based on this, a dialogue preview production pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above is referred to, and the number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge preview according to the first half icon display scenario. If so, a first button challenge preview performance pattern in which the number of character icons to be displayed is displayed is determined. In this first button challenge preview production pattern, the number of character icons displayed is displayed as the player operates the production button device 6310 multiple times, but if the player does not operate the production button device 6310 Even if the production button device 6
After the reception time of 310 ends, the displayed number of character icons are displayed.

On the other hand, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge preview due to the first half icon display scenario, the character icon indicating the expected level of jackpot and the content of the developing reach will not be displayed. The second button challenge preview production pattern is created based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (11th random value, etc.) so that it can be displayed with reference to a button challenge preview determination table (not shown). Determine. In this second button challenge preview performance pattern, character icons are displayed as the player operates the performance button device 6310 multiple times. In addition, in the second button challenge preview performance pattern, if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the text icon is not displayed, but after the reception time for the performance button ends, the text icon is displayed. You can do it like this.

In S6531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S6531-30 that it is a “symbol designation command”, the sub CPU
301 moves the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-40.

In S6531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed according to the type of the pattern designation command. Further, when the type of symbol designation command is a command corresponding to a jackpot symbol, jackpot round number data is set. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S6531-40 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-50.

In S6531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern stop process to stop displaying the decorative pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command".

If it is determined in S6531-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-60.

In S6531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot performance determination process to determine a jackpot performance performance pattern for performing the jackpot performance. In this jackpot performance determination process, a jackpot performance performance pattern is determined according to the jackpot round number data set in S6531-31. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-60, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "gaming state designation command".

If it is determined in S6531-60 that it is a “gaming state specification command”, sub-C
The PU 301 moves the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-70.

In S6531-61, the sub CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of the game state designation command. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 30
1 moves the process to S6531-62.

In S6531-62, the sub CPU 301 performs performance mode determination processing to determine the performance mode.

In this production mode determination process, when the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is set, "battle mode" is set as the production mode, and when the "high-precision non-time-saving game state" is set, the "golden hour mode" is set as the production mode, When in the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "dream mode" is set as the performance mode. Furthermore, when in the "normal gaming state", the game alternately shifts between the "Western mode" and the "Eastern mode" based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number, etc.). In addition, when in the "normal gaming state", the "
It may also be configured to transition between "Western Army Mode" and "Eastern Army Mode." In addition, in the normal game state, the present invention is not limited to the two production modes of "Western mode" and "Eastern mode", but may be configured to allow transition to three or more production modes. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 finishes the production pattern determination process, and changes the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).
(see).

In S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S6531-70 that it is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU
301 moves the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-73.

In S6531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display performance pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display performance pattern for performing the performance during standby of the game. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-72.

In S6531-73, the sub CPU 301 sets the effect button initialization button to instruct the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. processing. When this process is finished, the subCP
U301 ends the production pattern determination processing and moves the processing to animation request generation processing (see FIG. 211).

The production button initialization process is configured to be performed when a "demonstration display command" is received, but in addition to this, at least a "special symbol winning command" and a "special symbol fluctuation pattern command" are executed. , "Special symbol production stop command" or "Jackpot start display command" may also be configured to be performed when any one of the commands is received.

Further, the production button initialization process may be configured to be performed depending on the current gaming state and various commands. For example, the production button initialization process is performed regardless of the gaming state when a "demonstration display command" is received, but in the normal gaming state, "special symbol winning command", "special symbol fluctuation pattern command", or "special symbol It may also be configured to be performed when any one of the commands ``production stop command'' is received. In particular, since the average fluctuation time of the special symbols and the like vary depending on the gaming state, and the frequency of operation of the production button device 6310 differs, the production button device 6310 can be initialized while taking into account the gaming state.

In S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. When this process is finished, sub C
The PU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Performance contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images of "Western mode" and "Eastern mode" in the normal game state will be explained. FIG. 214 is an example of the normal display image of the West mode and the East mode in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 214(a) is an example of the normal display image of the West mode in the normal gaming state. This is an example, and FIG. 214(b) is an example of a normal display image in the East Army mode in the normal game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the performance section 6116, which is an annular structure, is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7.
An upper display area 7a is formed inside the display device 6 as a display area of the display device 7. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in this upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the normal display image of the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the left side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol. A pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayable. Also, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.
The sub-symbol 6072A is configured to be small and displayable. In the normal gaming state, when variable display of the first special symbol is performed, left symbol 6071L, middle symbol 6071C, right symbol 6
071R and the first sub-symbol 6071A are displayed in a variable manner, but when the second special symbol is variable-displayed, only the second sub-symbol 6072A is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed according to the number of reserved first special symbols. Special 1st pending image 607 showing that starting information is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (1)
2a, Special 1st 2nd mark indicating that starting information is stored in the 1st special symbol starting storage area (2)
Pending image 6072b, special first third pending image 6072c showing that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (3), starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4). A special 1st and 4th pending image 6072d indicating that the user is present is configured to be displayable. In addition,
In this embodiment, although the number of reserved second special symbols is not displayed, the number etc. indicating the number of reserved second special symbols can also be displayed.

In the normal display image in the Western Army mode, a Western Army icon display area 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. The Western Army icon display area 6074L displays an icon A display image 6074a indicating that character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war), and a character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army participates in the war). The icon B display image 6074b, character icon C (
For example, the icon C display image 6074c showing that the character icon D (for example, Western Army General D Participating in the War) is displayed, and the icon D display image 6 showing that the character icon D (for example, Western Army General D Participating in the War) is displayed.
074d, and an icon E display image 6074e indicating that a character icon E (for example, General E of the Western Army participating in the war) is displayed is configured to be displayable. The details will be described later, but when each character icon is displayed, the Western army icon display area 6074L corresponding to that character icon
The icon display image will be displayed lit.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image of the East Army mode in the normal gaming state, as in the West Army mode, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6071R,
1st sub-symbol 6071A, 2nd sub-symbol 6072A, Special 1 1st pending image 6072a, Special 1 2nd
A pending image 6072b, a special first third pending image 6072c, and a special first fourth pending image 6072d are configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image in the East Army mode, an East Army icon display area 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. This Eastern Army icon display area 6074R includes an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (for example, Eastern Army General F participates in the war) is displayed, and a character icon G (for example, Eastern Army General G participates in the war). Icon G display image 6074g indicating this, character icon H (
For example, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that the character icon I (for example, Eastern Army General I Participated in the War) is displayed, and an icon I display image 6 that shows that the character icon I (for example, Eastern Army General I Participated in the War) is displayed.
074i, and an icon J display image 6074j indicating that a character icon J (for example, General J of the Eastern Army participating in the war) is displayed. The details will be described later, but when each character icon is displayed, the East Army icon display area 6074R corresponding to that character icon
The icon display image will be displayed lit.

In this embodiment, in the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-mentioned "first half icons", and the icon display image lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section 6074L. The number corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above. In addition, in Togun mode in the normal game state, character icon F to character icon J
corresponds to the "first half icon", and the number of icon display images lit and displayed on the East Army icon display section 6074R corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the Western army icon display area 6074L and the Eastern army icon display area 607
4R is configured using the display device 7 as a predetermined display image, but it is also possible to separately provide an LED display for effect that can light up multiple locations individually and configure using the LED display for effect. good.

(Production of cherry blossom accumulation notice)
Next, the presentation of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be explained. FIGS. 215 and 216 are examples of display images illustrating the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In the explanation of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 214 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, and may interfere with the explanation of the effect. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 6071A and the second sub-symbol 6072A, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described in FIGS. 217 to 227.

Using Figures 215 and 216, a staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is carried out in two stages: a preliminary change and the start of the change, and a cherry blossom accumulation that displays "two character icons" in the change. 2-stage notice - Cherry blossom accumulation notice production corresponding to YK7's notice production pattern (see Figure 206), or a stage production that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, with 2 changes in advance and the start of the change.
Sakura accumulation stage 2 notice that will be carried out over stages and display the "yakuza icon" with the change - YK
An example of the presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the 24 notice presentation patterns (see FIG. 206) will be described.

FIG. 215(a) is an example of a display image when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state when the number of reserved first special symbols is two. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 215(a), none of the icon display images are lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section.

FIG. 215(b) is an example of a display image when variable display of decorative symbols is started as preliminary variation from the state of FIG. 215(a). As shown in FIG. 215(b), when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7 and are sucked into the upper display area 7a at the start of the preliminary variation. The desired display image will be produced.

FIG. 215(c) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state of FIG. 215(b) and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. As shown in FIG. 215(c), when the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a 1-level accumulation image indicating that the cherry blossoms have been accumulated by 1 level is displayed in the upper display area 7a, and then a decorative pattern is displayed. Performs a stop display. In addition, if the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a, but the cherry blossom accumulation notice fails to accumulate the cherry blossoms (cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0), one stage of accumulation will be carried out in the upper display area 7a. The image will not be displayed.

FIG. 215(d) is an example of a display image when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the state shown in FIG. 215(c) or as the variation. As shown in FIG. 215(d), when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a. The desired display image will be produced.

FIG. 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state shown in FIG. 215(d). As shown in FIG. 216(e), when cherry blossoms are newly drawn into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulation image indicating that two levels of cherry blossoms have been accumulated is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 216(f) is an example of a display image when character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war) is displayed from the state of FIG. 216(e) as a result of a button challenge notice or the like. Figure 21
As shown in 6(f), when character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army joins the war) is displayed due to a button challenge notice that is different from the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the icon A display image lights up in the Western Army icon display area. ``One person gathering'' is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a two-stage accumulated image and a character image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 216(g) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in FIG. 216(g), at a predetermined timing such as before the reach, the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released, and a display is performed in which the cherry blossoms cover the entire display area. Note that the timing at which the cherry blossoms accumulated in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely changed as appropriate.

Figure 216 (h-1) shows that after the cherry blossoms are released, the path develops to the final battle.
This is an example of a display image when the "yakuza icon" is displayed. As shown in Figure 216 (h-1), in the case of Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2nd Stage Notice - YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "yakuza icon" indicating that the path will progress to the ultimate battle will be displayed. Is displayed. After that, the road to the ultimate battle will be staged.

FIG. 216 (h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the cherry blossoms are released. As shown in Figure 216 (h-2), cherry blossom accumulation stage 2 notice - YK7
In this case, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, two character icons are displayed: character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army participates in the war) and character icon C (for example, General C of the Western Army participates in the war). . Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit and displayed in the western army icon display section, and "3 people gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, in FIGS. 215 and 216, an example of the production of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the notice performance patterns of the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage notice - YK7 and the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage notice - YK24 has been described, but other cherry blossom accumulation notice performances are described. The same applies to the preview performance pattern (see FIG. 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation preview of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change), and the display It is possible to arouse interest in the results and further improve the interest in the game.

(Pseudo continuous performance)
Next, the performance of the "pseudo continuous performance" will be explained. FIGS. 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo-continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 217 to 219, two pseudo-continuous performances are performed, and five character icons are displayed, which corresponds to the first half icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see Figure 204), which progress to the decisive battle. An example of pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. Furthermore, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo-continuous effect explained using FIGS. 217 to 219 is based on the first half set order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 205) corresponding to the display order pattern 1.

FIG. 217(a) is an example of a display image when all the decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the Western Army icon display section are lit up, and "2 people are gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a. Displayed.

FIG. 217(b) is an example of a display image when the left symbol is temporarily stopped and then the right symbol is also temporarily stopped.

FIG. 217(c) is an example of a display image when the right symbol, which has been temporarily stopped and displayed, starts variable display again (right symbol sliding) from the state of FIG. 217(b).

FIG. 217(d) is an example of a display image when the first pseudo continuous stimulation effect is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol. As shown in FIG. 217(d), when the right symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the character icon C (
A display will be displayed to indicate whether or not "Western Army General C Participation in the War" will be stopped.

FIG. 218(e) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo-coupling effect is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(e), when the pseudo-coupling effect is successful and the "character icon C (Western Army General C participates in the war)" stops at the middle symbol position, the icon C display image is displayed in the Western Army icon display area. is lit up, and "3 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, if the first pseudo-coupling effect fails, the character icon C (Western Army General C)
Participation) is erased, the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol of a different type from the left symbol, and then all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, resulting in a "lose".

FIG. 218(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon is stopped at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(f), "Pseudo x 1 time" indicating the first pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the first pseudo continuous effect, and
All the decorative patterns of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 218(g) is an example of a display image when the second pseudo-coupling effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(g), when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, “
A display indicating whether or not character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war) and character icon E (Western Army General E participates in the war) is to be stopped is displayed.

FIG. 218(h) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo-coupling effect is successful. As shown in Figure 218(h), "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (Western Army General E
When "Participating in War)" stops, the icon D display image and the icon E display image are illuminated in the Western Army icon display area, and "5 people are gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons. .

In addition, when the second pseudo-association performance fails, "Character icon D (Western army general D
"Participating in the War)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E Participating in the War)" are deleted, the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same type of symbol as the left symbol, and a normal reach is performed.

FIG. 219(i) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon is stopped at the position of the middle symbol and the second pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 219(i), "Pseudo x 2 times" indicating the second pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the second pseudo continuous effect, and
All the decorative patterns of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern start to be displayed in a variable manner.

In FIG. 219(j), all the icon display images are displayed in the western army icon display area,
This is an example of a display image when a "road icon" indicating that the road develops to a decisive battle is displayed. As shown in Figure 219 (j), after the second pseudo-sequence performance started, all the icon display images were lit up in the Western Army icon display area, indicating that it would develop into a decisive battle. A “road icon” will be displayed. After that, the road to the final battle will be staged.

In addition, in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39
An example of a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the first half set order scenario 5-1 has been described. The same applies to continuous performances.

In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment does not simply depend on whether or not re-variation occurs;
The number of character icons displayed, the types of character icons, the display order of character icons, etc. that are displayed at the time of re-variation give new interest, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Production of the road to the decisive battle)
Next, I will explain the production of ``The Road to the Decisive Battle.'' FIGS. 220 and 221 are examples of display images illustrating the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIG. 220 and FIG. 221, pre-reach production patterns 9 and 12, which are the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode, and in which 8 character icons are displayed and develop into a confrontation reach. , 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see FIG. 200), an example of the presentation of the road to the decisive battle will be explained.

Here, the road to the decisive battle is a performance that aims to have the player operate the performance button device 6310 a first number of times and collect 10 character icons by the end of a predetermined time. “Operation performance time” during which the performance button device 6310 can be operated for one operation.
is set. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) includes a reception time of 3 seconds for the production button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result.
The "operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated five times as the first number of operations. The configuration of the operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle, the reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be described in detail later using FIG. 228.

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, in the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western Army mode, it is assumed that all icon display images in the Western Army icon display area are lit. Therefore, near the Western Army icon display section, a text image of "Western Army Unite" is displayed, indicating that all the icon display images of the Western Army icon display section are lit. Furthermore, in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a ``countdown display image'' is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the ``operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle'' ends. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310 (see FIG. 228); A number image indicating the number of operations may be displayed.

FIG. 220(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the effect button device 6310. As shown in FIG. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the performance button device 6310, a performance button image for prompting the player to operate the performance button device 6310, and a performance button below the performance button image. A gauge image indicating the reception time of the button device 6310 is displayed. The same is true for the production of the road to the final battle.

FIG. 220(b) is an example in which "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(b), when the "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed, the icon H display image is illuminated in the Eastern Army icon display area, and the character icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. "6 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number.

FIG. 220(c) is an example of a display image when the second operation of the production button device 6310 is possible.

FIG. 220(d) is an example of a display image when "Approaching!?" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the production button device 6310 is operated for the second time. This "Approaching!?" icon is an icon that corresponds to a so-called failure without the character icon being displayed, and the selection rate and scenario are adjusted so that a predetermined number of character icons are finally displayed. etc., the displayed icons are adjusted.

FIG. 221(e) is an example of a display image when the third to fourth operations of the production button device 6310 have been completed and it is possible to perform the fifth (final) operation of the production button device 6310. .

FIG. 221(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the fifth time (last time). As shown in FIG. 221(f), when "Character icon G (Eastern Army General G participates in the war)" and "Character icon F (Eastern Army General F participates in the war)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the East Army icon display area The icon G display image and the icon F display image are displayed with lighting, and "8 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 221(g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image reaches zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

FIG. 221(h) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a character image indicating that the character image will develop into a confrontation reach is displayed. Here, in the confrontation reach, since the effect is performed using the displayed character icons, a character image indicating the number of character icons is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a, as shown in FIG. 221(h). ing. After the display shown in FIG. 221(h) is performed, a confrontation reach effect will be performed.

In addition, in FIGS. 220 and 221, pre-reach performance patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 are shown for the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western army mode. Although we have explained an example of the corresponding performance of the road to a decisive battle, we also discuss the performance of the road to a decisive battle developed from the East Army mode and other pre-reach performance patterns (see Figure 200) that perform the road to a decisive battle. The same is true.

In this way, the performance of the road to the decisive battle of this embodiment is a performance in which the player aims to collect 10 character icons by operating the performance button device 6310 by the end of a predetermined time, and the player It is possible to encourage the players to actively participate in the game, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

(Production of the road to the final battle)
Next, I will explain the production of ``The Road to the Final Battle.'' FIG. 222 is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of the road to the ultimate battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 222 is a production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western Army mode, and is a pre-reach production pattern 32 (Fig. 2
An example of the production of the road to the ultimate battle that corresponds to (see 00) will be explained.

Here, the path to the ultimate battle is a specific performance similar to the path to the decisive battle, and the player is made to operate the performance button device 6310 a second number of times until the predetermined time period ends. This is a performance aimed at collecting character icons, and an "operation performance time" is set during which the performance button device 6310 can be operated a second number of times. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) includes a reception time of 3 seconds for the production button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result, and the second operation is performed more often than the first operation. 1 as the number of times
"Operation performance time for the road to the ultimate battle" so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated 0 times.
is set to 40 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the performance of the road to the ultimate battle developed from the Western army mode, the "operation performance time of the road to the ultimate battle" is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. A "countdown display image" is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the end. In the present embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310, but instead of the countdown display image, the production button device 63
A number image indicating the maximum number of operations of 10 may be displayed.

FIG. 222(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the effect button device 6310. At the start of the performance of the road to the final battle, the icon display image lit and displayed in the western army icon display section continues to be displayed until the performance of the road to the final battle is started. In FIG. 222(a), character icon A has already been displayed by the time the presentation of the road to the ultimate battle begins, and the icon A display image continues to be lit in the western army icon display area.

FIG. 222(b) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon D is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 222(b), when "Character icon D (Western army general D participates in war)" and "Character icon H (Western army general H participates in war)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the Western army icon display area The icon D display image of and the icon H display image of the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up, and "3 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the production button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In FIG. 222(c), all the icon display images in the Western Army icon display area and the East Army icon display area are lit and displayed.

FIG. 222(d) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a character image indicating that the game will develop into a big decisive battle reach is displayed. At this time, the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. Figure 2
After the display shown in 22(d) is carried out, a big decisive battle reach effect will be carried out.

In addition, in FIG. 222, there is a pre-reach performance pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and progresses to the great decisive battle, which is a production of the road to the final battle that is developed from the western army mode. We have explained an example of the corresponding performance of the road to the final battle, but there are also other pre-reach performance patterns such as the production of the road to the ultimate battle that is developed from the East Army mode and the road to the great decisive battle (Figure 2
The same applies to 00).

In this embodiment, in the production of the road to the decisive battle or the production of the road to the decisive battle, the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the western army icon display section and the eastern army icon display section is set to
This corresponds to the number of icons in the second half.

(Direction of confrontation reach)
Next, the performance of "Confrontation Reach" will be explained. FIGS. 223 and 224 are examples of display images illustrating the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Examples of performances corresponding to reach performance patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see FIG. 200) in which a confrontation reach is performed after eight character icons are displayed will be described using FIGS. 223 and 224.

FIG. 223(a) is an example of a display image when the confrontation reach is started. Figure 223 (
As shown in a) (and FIG. 221(h)), in the upper display area 7a, a character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the presentation of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle is continuously displayed. has been done.

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display device 7. . Note that the decorative pattern is displayed in a small movement at the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to spoil the presentation of the character.

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted and displayed to the number of support icons. As shown in FIG. 223(b), in the upper display area 7a, a text image indicating 8 character icons, ``8 people in progress'' is converted and displayed as ``support x 8'' as the number of support icons. An image is rendered. Note that when "9 people are gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of nine character icons, the display is converted to "support x 9" as the number of support icons. The image will be rendered.

FIG. 223(c) is a display image when an enemy character appears, and FIG. 223(b)
This is an example of a display image when eight character icons are converted and displayed into eight support icons.

FIG. 223(d) is an example of a display image when a friendly character is confronting an enemy character, and is an example of a display image when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a.
As shown in FIG. 223(d), in the upper display area 7a, a production button device 6310 is provided for the player.
It consists of a character image of ``PUSH'' to prompt the operation of ``PUSH'', and a face image (for example, the face of General A of the Western Army) that corresponds to the character icon already displayed on the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle. A support icon will be displayed.

FIG. 224(e) is a display image when an ally character is confronting an enemy character, when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. This is an example of a display image. In FIG. 224(e), when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated, and the words "opportunity" are displayed as a predetermined effect result. Note that what is displayed as a predetermined performance result is not limited to "opportunity", but also the support icon display scenario (Fig. 207).
The configuration is configured such that any one of "lines", "opportunity", "extreme heat", "LED", and "big battle icon" can be displayed based on the following.

FIG. 224(f) is a display image when an ally character is confronting an enemy character, and when the production button device 6310 is operated and the "big battle icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. This is an example of a display image. After the display shown in FIG. 224(f) is performed, a big decisive battle reach effect will be performed.

FIG. 224(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character and displays the final result. As shown in Figure 224 (h-1),
If the ally character wins, it becomes a jackpot, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss, as shown in FIG. 224 (h-2).

In addition, in FIGS. 223 and 224, reach effect patterns 4 and 6 for performing a confrontation reach are shown.
, 12, and 14 have been described, but the same applies to other reach performance patterns (see FIG. 200) in which a confrontation reach is performed after nine character icons are displayed.

In this way, the performance of the confrontation reach in this embodiment can be performed according to the number of character icons collected up to the confrontation reach (direction of the road to the decisive battle or road to the final battle), and is more It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production of lotus flower preview)
Next, I will explain the production of ``Lotus Flower Preview''. FIG. 225 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the lotus flower preview in the sixth pachinko game machine.

An example of presentation of a lotus flower notice corresponding to the notice presentation pattern of a success notice of a lotus flower (see FIG. 208) will be described with reference to FIG. 225.

FIG. 225(a) is an example of a display image when a bud is displayed in advance variation in the "golden hour mode" which is a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), in the "Golden Hour Mode" which is a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, the character image "Golden Hour" indicating the Golden Hour mode and the A count display image "beads" that cumulatively counts the number of game balls that enter the first prize opening 6131 and the second prize winning opening 6151 and are paid out, and an operation instruction image "beads" for making a right-handed hit. Right-handed
is displayed.

FIG. 225(b) is an example of a display image when the buds continue to be displayed although the preliminary variation has ended. Furthermore, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the previous change will continue to be displayed when the change starts.

Here, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the preliminary fluctuation will continue to be displayed from the preliminary fluctuation to the small winning gaming state to the fluctuation, even if the preliminary fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a small win. Therefore, in the lotus flower preview performance of this embodiment, the lotus flower can be continuously displayed without interrupting the performance by using the small winning game state that is easy to shift to when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140. You can enjoy flower forecasts.

FIG. 225(c) is an example of a display image when the buds are displayed as open when the fluctuation is started and a predetermined time has elapsed. When this bud opens, it is suggested that the "door opening effect" shown in FIG. 225(d) will develop.

In addition, in FIG. 225, an example of the performance of a lotus flower notice that corresponds to the notice performance pattern of a success notice of a lotus flower has been described, but the notice performance pattern of a notice of failure of a lotus flower (see FIG. 208)
The same applies to the presentation of the lotus flower preview that corresponds to .

(Battle reach production)
Next, the production of "Battle Reach" will be explained. FIGS. 226 and 227 are examples of display images illustrating the battle reach effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 226 and 227, the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode in the first symbol production patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 (see FIG. 201). An example of the corresponding battle reach performance will be explained.

FIG. 226(a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance performance performed when a battle reach is started. In battle reach, it is possible to perform a button promotion chance effect first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), above the display area of the display device 7, a production button device 63 is provided.
"Button operation icons" indicating ten operation modes are scrolled from left to right. Further, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a “performance button state image” indicating the current state of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is displayed.

FIG. 226(b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is stopped and displayed and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), in the upper display area 7a, a button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the production button device 6310 is displayed in a stopped state. Correspondingly, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a performance button state image indicating the state of the third operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 226(c) is an example of a display image when an ally character and an enemy boss are facing off.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), a button operation icon of "Lv 3 consecutive hits" indicating the third operation mode of the production button device 6310 is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 226(d) is an example of a display image when an attack of an ally character hits an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when the attack of an ally character hits the enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level, and the production button device 631
The button operation icon is changed to "Lv4 one-shot" which indicates the fourth operation mode of 0. Note that if the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy boss or the enemy boss attacks the ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

FIG. 227(e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes, following FIG. 226(d).

As shown in FIG. 226(e), since the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the button operation icon for "Lv4 blow", the production button is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. The effect button state image indicating the state of the fourth operation mode of the device 6310 is changed and displayed.

In FIG. 227(f-1), the confrontation between the friendly character and the enemy boss is repeated, and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player presses the production button device 6310.
This is an example of a display image when performing the operation.

In FIG. 227 (f-2), the confrontation between the friendly character and the enemy boss is repeated, and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fifth operation mode, and the player presses the production button device 6310.
This is an example of a display image when performing the operation.

FIG. 227(g-1) shows that the player operates the performance button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. 227(f-1), and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) This is an example of a display image showing that the player has fallen (not shown) and has won a jackpot.

In FIG. 227(g-2), the player operates the performance button device 6310 from the state of FIG. 227(f-1) or FIG. 227(f-1), and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) This is an example of a display image indicating that the object did not fall (not shown) and was a loss.

In addition, in FIGS. 226 and 227, an example of the battle reach performance corresponding to the first symbol performance patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 has been explained, but the first symbol performance patterns 2 and 7 (FIG. 20
The same applies to the presentation of battle reach corresponding to (see 1).

In this way, in the battle reach production of this embodiment, the operation mode of the production button device 6310 is changed according to the result of the content of the production, so that the production that the player will directly operate from now on Changes in the operation mode of the button device 6310 (growth of the effect button) can generate new interest and further improve the interest of the game.

[8-11. Composition of operation performance time and reception time]
Next, the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle, the reception time of the performance button device 6310, etc. will be explained. FIG. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram illustrating the structure of the operation performance time and the reception time of the performance button device in the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 228(1) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle.

As shown in FIG. 228(1), the production button device 631 is pressed once in the production of the road to the decisive battle.
The operation time of 0 consists of 4 seconds, which is the sum of 3 seconds of reception time and 1 second of display time for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result. The "Road to the Decisive Battle" operation performance time is set to 20 seconds. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, the maximum number of operations of the performance button device 6310 is controlled by a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time for the road to the decisive battle" ends. That's what you're suggesting. Although the number of operations differs, this is the same in the production of the road to the final battle.

Furthermore, when the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time, a predetermined icon is continuously displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time.
If the operation 10 is not performed, a predetermined icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time until the end of the display time.

Regarding the production button device 6310, when the production button device 6310 is operated during such reception time, the reception time ends and a predetermined image is displayed (a predetermined production is performed) from the time of operation. The production is called a ``single operation production,'' and the same applies to the production of the road to the ultimate battle.

FIG. 228 (2a) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the reception time for one-time operation performance.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2a), the reception time of the performance button device 6310 for one-time operation performance is from the reception time to the first period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) of the performance button device 6310. The second period (for example, 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as the "invalid start period" in which the operation of 6310 is determined to be invalid.
The period from the "start invalid period" to the "end invalid period" is set as the "valid period" for which the operation of the production button device 6310 is determined to be valid. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 228 (2b), even if the "invalid start period" and "invalid end period" are not included in the reception time and the period immediately before the start of the reception time is set as the "invalid start period". Alternatively, the period immediately after the end of the reception time may be set as the "invalid termination period." In this case, the reception time directly corresponds to the "valid time".

In contrast, even if the production button device 6310 is operated during the reception time, the reception time does not end and the production button device 6310 can be operated multiple times during the reception time. For example, button challenge notice, door opening performance, battle reach when the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the third operation mode (Lv 3 consecutive hits), etc.)
The structure of the reception hours is different.

FIG. 228(3) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the reception time for the continuous hit operation performance.

As shown in Figure 228 (3), the "start invalid period", "end invalid period", and "valid period (initial)" are set in the reception time of the multiple-hit operation performance, because the one-time operation performance is It is the same as the structure of reception hours.

Then, when the production button device 6310 is operated within the "valid period (initial period)", the sub CPU 301 determines that the operation of the production button device 6310 is invalid for a predetermined period after the operation. is newly set.

This "operation invalid period" is set to a different period by the sub CPU 301 depending on the content of the performance triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310. For example, when the performance progresses, the performance button device 6310 vibrates, and a third period (
For example, 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) are set. On the other hand, when the performance is not progressing, the performance button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period shorter than the third period (for example, 4 frames, 4/4 60 seconds, etc.) is set.

In this way, in the repeated press operation performance, different periods are set depending on the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310, so that the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310 can be performed reliably. be able to.

[8-12. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates "external information 1" to "external information 8" in the gaming state specification parameter setting process, and generates "external information 1" to "external information 8".
will be output to the external terminal board 184. The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1", etc.
These are various signals of "external information 8,""prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 229 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 65), from each channel "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "
Various signals such as "prize ball information 2" and "security" are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in terms of output conditions for the "external information 3" signal output from the connector CH3. Below, conditions for outputting "external information 3" will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 229, "external information 3" includes "outputting during all jackpots, during probability changes, and time saving" as well as "outputting during all jackpots, during probability changes, and during time saving", as well as "outputs when changes start during probability changes", as in the first pachinko machine. A new output condition has been added to "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol".

Here, in the "simultaneous variation machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, a specific time-saving game state consisting of a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state Although the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has started from the gaming state, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game is started using the special symbol whose variable display has ended first. An error case may occur in which the state is shifted to the normal gaming state and a special symbol whose variable display ends later is determined to be a jackpot, loss, etc. in the normal gaming state. "
By adding the above-mentioned new output conditions to ``External Information 3'', the occurrence of the above error case is eliminated, and in ``simultaneous variation machines'', the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive wins triggered by a specific gaming state, etc. can be measured accurately. This will be specifically explained using a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal as an example.

FIG. 230 is an example of a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 230 shows the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol, the output and stop of the external information 3, and the transition of the gaming state vertically.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the high-precision non-time saving gaming state which is one of the specific gaming states, the first
The special symbol starts variable display at the 119th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display at the 120th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state.

The variable display of the second special symbol ends before the first special symbol, and the display is stopped. When this second special symbol is stopped, the gaming state shifts from the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

The first special symbol is variably displayed from the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state.

Even if the external information 3 shifts from the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is Output continues until the variable display ends.

Thereby, even if the first special symbol of the 119th rotation results in a jackpot, it can be counted as the number of jackpots triggered by a specific gaming state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 178 etc.,
The configuration of the game board unit (see Figure 173), the special symbol lottery contents (see Figure 175), the rules for transition to the game state (see Figure 177), etc. are organically related, and the end of all jackpot game states is , the player moves to the ``(first half) high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'' where the expectation level for consecutive jackpots is high, and when the high-accuracy gaming state ends and the expectation level for consecutive jackpots is low, the high-accuracy (second half) ``Non-time-saving gaming state: Small hit RUSH'' and the transitioned to ``High-precision non-time-saving gaming state: Small winning RUSH''
In this game, not only can you expect the payout of the game ball, but you can also expect the jackpot of the second special symbol that guarantees the transition to the next jackpot game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and making the game even more enjoyable. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, as explained in FIG. 198 etc., when the yakuza icon is displayed by making a cherry blossom accumulation notice, it develops into a presentation of the road to the final battle, and a pseudo consecutive presentation is performed. When 5 character icons are collected by doing so, it will develop into a production of the road to the decisive battle. Then, when it develops into a production of the road to the final battle or a production of the road to the decisive battle, a specific production of the same type (a production aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be executed. Therefore, various performances can be associated with each other to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the 6th pachinko machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a staged effect in which cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step, and the accumulated cherry blossoms are released and a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" are displayed. It consists of an icon display effect that displays. The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation. In addition, the staged presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation preview is set such that the more cherry blossoms accumulate, the more expected the ``yakuza icon'' will be displayed and the number of ``character icons'' displayed will increase.
For this reason, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change). It is possible to arouse interest in the displayed results and further improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo continuous effect" is such that when any of the plurality of character icons stops, the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, one or more character icons are displayed. It is possible to collect. Then, when five character icons are collected, the process develops into a production of the road to the decisive battle. Further, the content of the future game is suggested by the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order of collection (display order) of character icons, etc.
For this reason, the "pseudo-continuous effect" of this embodiment does not simply depend on whether or not re-variation is performed, but also the number of character icons displayed at the time of re-variation, the type of character icons, and the order in which the character icons are displayed. It is possible to add new interest to the game, etc., and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "performance of the road to the decisive battle" and the "performance of the road to the ultimate decisive battle" can be performed by the player by operating the production button device 6310 until the predetermined time period ends.
It is a performance where you can aim to collect individual character icons. And 10
When character icons are collected, it will develop into a big decisive battle reach with the highest expectation of jackpot. Further, it is also possible to suggest the content of the future game based on the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
Therefore, the "performance of the road to the final battle" and "performance of the road to the final battle" of this embodiment encourage the player to actively participate in the game (operate the performance button device 6310), and make the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, "Showdown Reach" converts the character icons collected up to the showdown reach (the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle) into support icons,
By operating the production button device 6310, production using support icons is possible.
Therefore, in the "confrontation reach" of the present embodiment, operation performance can be performed using the icons collected up to the confrontation reach, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable over the advance fluctuation and the fluctuation, and even if the advance fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a small hit, the "lotus flower notice" is It is configured to be displayed continuously from the winning game state to the fluctuation.
For this reason, the "lotus flower preview" of this embodiment uses a small winning game state that is easy to shift to when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, so that the lotus flower can be continuously displayed without interrupting the performance. You can enjoy flower forecasts.

Furthermore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "battle reach" is a performance in which the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is changed depending on the result of the performance content.
For this reason, the "battle reach" of this embodiment arouses new interest in the change in the operation mode (growth of the production button) of the production button device 6310, which the player will directly operate from now on, and makes the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

(others)
In the sixth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

Techniques related to the present invention will be described below.

<Additional Note 1: Fourth Pachinko Game Machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, special symbols are displayed variably on a symbol display device when a game ball enters the starting hole, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode ( A so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) or a movable member of a variable winning device (big winning hole) is changed from a state where it is difficult for game balls to win a prize to a state where it is easy to win a prize based on the ball entering the game machine into the starting hole. , a gaming machine is known in which the jackpot game state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a specific area provided in the variable winning device (so-called two-type gaming machine). ).

In addition to the above-mentioned big prize opening and start opening, the gaming area is provided with a passage gate that operates a normal symbol, and when a game ball passes through the passage gate, a lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed.
If you win this normal symbol lottery, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting port opens.
In order to increase the interest of the game, most of the gaming machines equipped with such movable parts
It has a time-saving game state in which the movable member is easy to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable member is difficult to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-273866

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, regarding the operation of the movable member provided at a specific starting port, whether the game ball passes through the passing gate when in the time-saving gaming state or the gaming ball passes through the passing gate when in the non-time-saving gaming state. The players were only interested in passing the game, and further improvements were needed to make the game more interesting.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming panels 3100, 4100) in which a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, and a starting area ( For example, a starting area detection means (for example, a first starting opening switch 3121) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 3120), and a passing area (first starting opening 3120) provided in the gaming area.
A passage area detection means (for example, a first passage gate switch 3127A) that detects the entry of a game ball into the passage gate 3126A), and a passage area detection means (for example, a first passage gate switch 3127A) that is provided in the game area and has an open state where it is easy to accept a game ball and a closed state where it is difficult to accept it. On the condition that a game ball is detected by a changeable starting variable prize winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 3146) and the passing area detection means, the starting variable winning prize device is changed from a closed state to an open state. A normal game determining means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs an opening/closing judgment as to whether the normal symbol is open or closed, causes the normal symbol display device to start variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device. A normal symbol display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that performs control to stop display; and an opening mode determining means (e.g., main CPU 201) that determines an opening mode for changing the start variable prize winning device between the open state and the closed state. ), when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means, the start variable prize winning device is changed to the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determining means. A starting opening/closing control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs opening/closing control to control the opening and closing of When established, the game state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state), and includes a gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that controls the shifted gaming state,
The normal game determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means, and the opening mode determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means. The opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable start winning device detection means (for example, a second start opening switch 3141) that detects entry of a game ball into the variable start winning device, and a start area detection means. When the first transition condition (for example, when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established in response to the detection of a game ball, control of a special game advantageous to the player is performed. The second transition condition (for example, when a game ball enters the V attacker 3152 passes through the V winning hole), the second special game control means (for example, the main CPU 20) that controls the special game is established.
1) and,
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set more easily than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game determination for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player on the condition that a game ball is detected by the starting area detection means. means (for example, the main CPU 201), and a special symbol display control that causes the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, controls the special symbol display device to stop displaying the special symbol. means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means determines that the special game is not controlled by the special game determination means, and when the special symbol display control means stops displaying a specific special symbol (for example, C time-saving symbol, etc.). , specific gaming states (for example, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C
It is desirable to be able to control a specific gaming state by shifting the game to a time-saving gaming state (consisting of a time-saving gaming state).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol.
Selecting the variable display time of each special symbol from among the variable display times of a plurality of special symbols including at least the variable display time and the second variable display time of the special symbol, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. Multiple variable time tables with different rates (for example, Figures 113 to 1)
16) and a variable time table storage means (e.g., main ROM 202) that stores the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. , a variable time table determining means (e.g., main CPU 201) that determines one variable time table from among the plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means, and a special controller that determines the variable display time of the special symbol. Symbol fluctuation time determining means (for example, main CPU 201),
It is preferable that the special symbol fluctuation time determining means is capable of determining the variable display time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation time table determined by the fluctuation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special symbol determining means (for example,
main CPU 201),
The special symbol determining means selects a first special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) when it is determined by the special game determining means to control a first special game that can provide a first profit. ), and when it is determined that a second special game that can give a second profit with a lower profit rate than the first profit is to be controlled, a second special special symbol (e.g. , the symbol of "accessory opening per" corresponding to the small winning symbol switching information), and the variable time table determining means causes the special symbol display control means to stop displaying the second special special symbol. Then, when determining the variable display time of the special symbols from the next time onward, a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means (for example, the normal game state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3)) are used. It is possible to determine a special fluctuation time table from among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 114 (1) to (3). This is desirable.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game number counting means (for example, the main CPU 201
) and,
The game state control means is capable of shifting to a normal game state which is disadvantageous for the player when the special game number counting means counts a specific number of times (for example, a limiter number of times), and the variable time table determining means is configured to , when a specific number of games is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (for example, special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 shown in FIG. 116) that has a high execution rate.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means changes the specific gaming state ( For example, the time-saving gaming state is made up of the A-time saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, mainly the C-time-saving gaming state), and after the first termination condition is satisfied (for example,
When the control of the specific gaming state is ended and the first special special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means during one variable display of a special symbol,
After transitioning to the specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state consisting of an A-time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state B, and a time-saving gaming state C, mainly the A-time-saving gaming state), and after the second termination condition is satisfied (for example, It is preferable that the control of the specific gaming state is terminated after 100 variable display of special symbols, and that the first termination condition and the second termination condition are different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the game machine according to the present invention, the game board is provided in the game area so that the starting area is in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the passing area, and is close to the passing area. It is desirable that the game ball that has passed through the passage area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note 2: Fifth pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known that controls the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (
So-called two types of gaming machines). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, and the jackpot is opened in the jackpot. A prize ball corresponding to the entered game ball is paid out, and the player can win the game ball.

In addition to the above-mentioned big prize opening and start opening, the gaming area is provided with a passage opening that activates a normal symbol, and when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed. If you win this normal symbol lottery, a movable member (so-called electric tulip) installed in a specific starting port
opens. In order to increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members operate in a time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is easy to open per unit time, and in a non-time-saving gaming state in which the movable member is difficult to release per unit time. In the time-saving game state, the chances of drawing special symbols are increased (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-273866

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, even with a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving gaming state as in Patent Document 1, if the opportunity for players to acquire game balls is limited to special symbol drawings, the gameplay becomes monotonous. Therefore, further improvements were needed to increase the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (e.g., gaming panel 5100) in which a gaming area in which game balls flow down, and a normal area (eg, , a first passage opening 5126A, a second passage opening 5126B) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the gaming area (for example, a first passage opening switch 5127A, a second passage opening switch 5127B); a first variable prize winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 5146) that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy to accept game balls and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept; A second variable winning device (for example, a special electric accessory 5133) that can change to an unacceptable closed state, and the first variable winning device is opened on the condition that a game ball is detected by the normal area detection means. A normal opening/closing determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to change the state to the open/close state, and a first variable winning device detection means (for example, the start-up mouth switch 5141), a special benefit (for example, a small win) that causes the second variable winning device to be opened on the condition that a game ball is detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and the second Whether to grant any one of multiple types of benefits, including a state benefit that allows control of a predetermined gaming state (for example, time saving win) without making the variable winning device open. A profit granting determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) that determines a normal gaming state in which the first variable winning device is unlikely to be in the open state, or a specific gaming state in which the first variable winning device is likely to be in the open state (for example, A game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that performs control to execute a time-saving game state),
The benefit grant determination means is easier to determine to grant either the special benefit or the state benefit than to determine not to grant either the special benefit or the state benefit, and the gaming state control The means is characterized in that when it is determined by the benefit award determining means that the state benefit is to be awarded, the specific gaming state can be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the profit granting determination means performs a first special game (for example, a jackpot game state), and a second special game in which the second variable winning device is changed into an open state and a closed state by a second opening mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first opening mode.
For example, it is determined whether or not to give any of the profits from a plurality of types of profits including the small winning game state) and the state profit, and the second special game is given more than the first special game. It is desirable that it is easy to determine if a special game is given.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the profit award determining means makes a predetermined number of determinations (for example, one time saving number) in the specific gaming state, the normal game is changed from the specific gaming state. If the state is executable and the profit grant determining means determines that the state profit is to be given before the predetermined number of determinations are made, the specific gaming state is executed until the predetermined number of determinations are made again. It is desirable that it be practicable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state A that can be executed after the profit award determining means determines to award the special profit). ), and a second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the state benefit is determined to be provided by the profit award determining means, and the first specific gaming state is This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, the number of time savings is greater) than the second specific gaming state, and the gaming state control means, when executing the first specific gaming state, When it is determined that the state benefit is to be given, it is desirable that the first specific gaming state can be executed continuously without executing the second specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance means for performing a predetermined performance (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 3)
01) and,
When the special benefit is granted, the performance means is capable of performing a common special performance (for example, a bonus time basic performance or a bonus time specialized performance) that can be executed across a plurality of special benefits. When it is determined by the benefit provision determination means that the state benefit is to be provided, it is possible to perform a continuation special performance (for example, a rewind performance) indicating that the special performance will be continued for a further extension. This is desirable.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note 3: Sixth Pachinko Game Machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), or when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known that controls the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (
So-called two types of gaming machines). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the jackpot, and It is configured such that a prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

Then, based on the results of the special symbol lottery, in order to improve the interest of the game, after performing the first reach effect (long reach, SP reach), a second reach effect (SP reach) is performed.
A gaming machine that performs SP reach is known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-236850

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to further improve the interest of the game by increasing the relevance of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, etc., and further improving the effects such as the reach effect.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can display a variable identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Effect execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, effect accessory group 58, and effect button device 6
310, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301),
The performance execution means is
When the first performance execution condition (for example, acquisition of the road to the ultimate battle icon) is established by performing the first performance (for example, cherry blossom accumulation notice), the second performance (for example, the road to the ultimate battle) is established. is executable,
When the second performance execution condition (for example, display of five character icons) is satisfied by performing a third performance different from the first performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance), a fourth performance (for example, , the road to a decisive battle) is possible;
The second performance and the fourth performance are characterized in that the same type of specific performance (for example, a performance aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be performed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means:
As the first performance, a staged performance in which the performance progresses in stages (for example, a cherry blossom accumulation notice);
A first development display effect (for example, a character icon) capable of displaying predetermined development information (for example, a character icon)
For example, it is desirable to be able to display a text image indicating the number of character icons such as "One person gathering", or display an icon display image lit up in the Western Army icon display area, etc. .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means:
As the third performance, the identification symbol which is being displayed in a fluctuating manner is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance multiple times in which the temporarily stopped display of the identification symbol is again displayed in a variable manner, and display predetermined development information (for example, a character icon) each time the pseudo-continuous performance is performed. It is possible to perform a second development display effect (for example, a display in which one or more character icons are displayed in a stopped state, or an icon display image is displayed in a lit state in the Western Army icon display area, etc.). is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a first performance operation section 6311 and a second performance operation section 6312 included in the performance button device 6310) through which the player can perform operations regarding the performance. and,
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform an operation performance that causes the player to operate the performance operation section a predetermined number of times (for example, a one-time operation performance on the road to the decisive battle or the road to the final battle). It is desirable that the number of operations of the operation performance in the second performance is greater than the number of operations of the operation performance in the fourth performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means:
By performing the second performance or the fourth performance, the third performance execution condition (for example,
If less than 10 character icons) is established, the fifth effect (for example, confrontation reach) can be executed,
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform a development progress performance that displays predetermined development information and progresses according to the displayed development information (for example, a performance that aims to collect 10 character icons). ,
As the fifth performance, it is preferable that a development performance (for example, a performance using a support icon) related to the development information progressed and displayed in the development progress performance can be performed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a starting information acquisition means (e.g., main CPU 201) that acquires starting information when the predetermined starting condition is met, and a starting information acquisition means based on the starting information acquired by the starting information obtaining means. The first special game that is advantageous to the player (for example,
A first special game determination means (for example, main C
PU201) and whether or not to control a second special game (for example, a small winning game) with a lower profit than the first special game based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquisition means. The second special game determining means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs the determination, and the first special game on the condition that the first special game determining means determines that the first special game is to be controlled.
special game control means (for example,
When the predetermined starting condition is established in a state where the main CPU 201), the first special game determining means, and the second special game determining means cannot make a determination, the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means is Reservation storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of reservations (
For example, based on the main RAM 203) having a special symbol start storage area, and the start information stored in the pending storage means before the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination, and a preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining whether to control the first special game or the second special game, based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means. , advance performance execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, L
Sub-control circuit 30 that controls the ED group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310
0, sub CPU 301),
The advance performance execution means is
Even if the second special game is controlled by the special game control means during the predetermined performance period, it is desirable that the preliminary performance can be continued.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a starting information acquisition means (e.g., main CPU 201) that acquires starting information when a first starting condition or a second starting condition is satisfied; special game determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines whether or not to control a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the starting information that has been received;
When the first starting condition is satisfied in a state where the special game determining means cannot make a determination, a first game machine capable of storing starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means up to a first pending number When the second start condition is satisfied in a state where the suspension storage means (for example, the main RAM 203 having the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) and the special game determination means cannot make a determination. , a second reservation storage means (for example, a main unit having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a second reservation number; RAM 203) and whether or not to control the special game based on start information stored in the first suspension storage means or the second suspension storage means before the special game determination means makes a determination. A preliminary determination means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of making such a determination, and a preliminary performance execution capable of performing a pending preliminary performance (for example, a fan notice) based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means. means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310),
The advance performance execution means is
When a predetermined number (for example, 2) of start information is stored in the second hold storage means, a hold advance performance may be performed based on the start information stored in the first hold storage means. It is desirable that this is possible.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a first performance operation section 6311 and a second performance operation section 6312 included in the performance button device 6310) through which the player can perform operations regarding the performance. and an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the production operation part (for example, the first to third operation part detection switches included in the production button device 6310), and a function that determines whether the operation detected by the operation detection means is valid or invalid. further comprising an operation determining means (for example, sub CPU 301) for determining whether there is a
The operation determining means is configured to disable the operation on the performance operation unit during a start preparation period set at the opening time of the reception time when there is a reception time during which multiple operations on the performance operation unit can be accepted. The end preparation period set at the end of the reception time is determined to be invalid, and the operation valid period is set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period. determines that the operation on the production operation section is valid, but it is possible to set an operation invalid period from when the operation detected during the operation valid period is determined to be valid until the next operation is determined to be valid. ,
It is preferable that the operation invalidation period is set to a different period depending on an effect based on an operation determined to be valid during the operation validity period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations on a performance and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
Operation display performance execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46) capable of performing operation display performance (for example, display of a performance button state image) that displays the performance operation section
, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance accessory group 58 and the performance button device 6310, and sub-C
PU301),
The operation display performance execution means, in accordance with a change in the operation mode of the performance operation section to be operated,
It is desirable to perform the operation display performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations on a performance and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
When a predetermined condition including that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since a predetermined game was played by a player is satisfied, an operation mode resetting means (for example, a button control circuit) returns the operation mode of the performance operation section to the initial operation mode. 310, a sub control circuit 300, and a sub CPU 301).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the first notification symbol (for example, the first special symbol) starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the first A first notification symbol display control means (for example, a main C
PU201) and when the second starting condition is established, the second notification symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is activated.
a second notification symbol display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that starts variable display of the first notification pattern and stops displaying the second notification pattern in a predetermined stop mode after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed;
When the first notification pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the notification pattern display control means, or when the second notification pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification pattern display control device,
Game state control means (for example, the main CPU 20
1), and external information output means (for example,
an external terminal board 184);
The variable display of the first notification pattern by the first notification pattern display control means and the variable display of the second notification pattern by the second notification pattern display control device can be executed in parallel,
The gaming state control means controls the first notification symbol and the second notification symbol in the specific gaming state.
When the stop display of the notification symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, controlling the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state,
The external information output means continues to output specific external information (for example, external information 3) during an output period from when the specific gaming state is controlled by the gaming state control means until the normal gaming state is controlled. In addition to the output, when the first notification symbol display control means starts variable display of the first notification symbol when the specific gaming state is controlled, the stop display of the first notification symbol is performed. the first additional period until the second notification pattern is stopped, and if the second notification pattern display control means starts variable display of the second notification pattern when the specific gaming state is controlled, the second notification pattern stops. It is desirable to continue outputting the specific external information even during the second additional period until it is displayed.

In addition, "development information" is information that is displayed as the game or performance progresses, including textual information that indicates the content of the performance that will proceed from now on, character icon information that displays a predetermined character, Information such as number information that displays the number of character icons, number information that displays the number of pseudo-sequences that have already been performed, and time information until the next production progresses. It means something.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

7 Display device 7a Upper display area 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
301 Sub CPU
310 Button control circuit 6100 Game panel 6120A First starting port (middle)
6120B 1st starting port (right)
6140 2nd starting opening 6126 Passing gate 6131 1st grand prize opening 6151 2nd grand prize opening 6310 Production button device

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that is capable of displaying a variable identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met, and that can shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
and a performance execution means capable of performing a predetermined performance while the variable display of the identification symbol is being performed,
The performance execution means is
When the first performance execution condition is satisfied by performing the first performance, the second performance can be performed,
When a second performance execution condition different from the first performance execution condition is established by performing a third performance different from the first performance, a fourth performance can be performed,
The second performance and the fourth performance are capable of performing the same type of specific performance, and
When the third performance execution condition is satisfied by performing the second performance or the fourth performance, a fifth performance different from the special performance can be performed without executing the special performance. and when the third performance execution condition is not satisfied, the special performance can be executed without executing the fifth performance ,
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform a development progress performance that displays predetermined development information and progresses according to the displayed development information,
It is possible to display information other than predetermined development information as the development progress presentation,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the fifth performance, it is possible to perform a development performance related to the development information.